Sie sind auf Seite 1von 284

TH-100

Full-digital Ultrasound Diagnostic System

Instruction Manual
(V1.2)

Precautions for operators and maintenance personnel


Please do read and understand all instructions in this manual before service

Please keep this manual within easy access after use

TEKNOVA Medical Systems Limited


Beijing , China

Instruction Documentation
Copyright TEKNOVA Medical Systems Limited

Declaration
Copyright TEKNOVA Medical Systems Limited. All Rights Reserved. The contents of this
publication may not be used, copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without
prior written permission of TEKNOVA Medical Systems Limited.
TEKNOVA Medical Systems Limited holds the final interpretation for this Instruction Manual.
TEKNOVA Medical Systems Limited may revise this publication from time to time without
prior notice.
TEKNOVA Medical Systems Limited holds the right to make changes in product design and
specification without prior notice.
If images and objects in this Instruction Manual look different from the real ones because of
printing, take the real ones as standard.

Manufacturer and Service Organization


Teknova Medical Systems Limited
Address: Teknova Building, 2 Yongjie North Road, Haidian, Beijing 100094, China
Service Hotline: 86-10-57682244
Homepage: http://www.teknova.cn/en
E-mail: international@teknova.cn

EU Delegate
Name: Raymond Lam Sai Kit
Passport No.: 704681471
Addr: Poolse Winglaan 14
9501 Sint-Denijs-Westrem
Belgium
Tel: 0032-486867374
Fax: 0032-922144708
E-mail: cathy_yuan_cn@yahoo.com

Issuing Record and Document Number


2012.04 V1.2
THH1.452.016SSE

Safety Instructions

Safety Instructions
To help you operate TH-100 safely and correctly, this instruction manual also includes
descriptions of the structure, setup, maintenance and operation of the machine. Please
strictly follow.
This equipment is limited to the use by doctors or special examination technicians
who are familiar with the operation of the equipment.

Symbols and Definitions in the Manual


Symbols

!
Notice

Definitions
This symbol indicates actions or conditions that should be
avoided during operation. If not strictly followed, they could
lead to personal death or serious injury or serious property
damage such as total loss of equipment or indirect danger
such as fire.
This symbol indicates actions or conditions that should be
avoided during operation. If not strictly followed, they could
lead to slight or medium personal injury, partly loss of
equipment and computer data.
This symbol indicates actions or conditions that are forbidden.

This symbol indicates complementary explanations.

Safety Criterion symbols and definitions


AC

Protective earth (ground)

Safety Instructions

Equipotential
Prevent water
Attention! Refer to document

Power off

Power on

OffOnly used in a part of equipment

OnOnly used in a part of equipment


Dangerous voltage

Fan caution Be careful of your hands

Probe connector - B-type parts


Probe connector - BF-type parts

Nonionized radiation

Users responsibility for equipment management


Users (hospitals and clinics) should take responsibilities for the use and maintenance of
the equipment.
Please do not remodel the equipment without consent of the manufacturer. The
manufacturer does not provide warranty on any damages or malfunctions if the equipment
II

Safety Instructions

is modified without prior consent. If any modification is necessary, please consult the
manufacturer or authorized organizations in advance.

Prohibition of Equipment Alteration


Please do not alter this equipment without permission of the manufacturer. The
manufacturer wont be able to provide warranty service on breakdown or failure due to
unauthorized alteration. Please do consult the manufacturer or the manufacturer
appointed parties before any necessary alterations.

Stipulations
The following stipulations are made to simplify and standardize wording of this instruction
manual.
[1]
[2]

[3]

[4]
[5]
[6]

[7]

Buttons on the control panel or in the programs are all indicated by. For example,
OKrefers to the confirm button in dialog boxes in the program.
Text edit box and multiple-choice box are expressed by [ ]. For example, [name]
indicates a text edit box which names are to be put in. [male] and [Female] indicate
multiple choices of man and woman.
Serial number of figures: Serial numbers of figures are compiled in the order of
chapter, section and so on. For example, Figure 1.2.4-1 indicates that this is the
first figure of Chapter 1, Part 2, Section 4.
Push up, Push down and Push: Refers to pushing menu buttons on the control
panel.
Single Click or Click: Use the trackball to move the cursor on the target button and
pressSet.
Check: If there is a checkable box in front of a choice button, use the trackball to
move the cursor to the box and press Set to check it. For example,
.
Uncheck: If there is a checked box in front of a choice button, use the trackball to
move the cursor to the box and press Setto uncheck it. For example,
.

[8]

Choose or chosen: For multiple-choice menu, such as

, roll

the trackball to move the cursor to the target and press Setto choose. For
multi-choice drop-down menu, such as
, roll the trackball to
move the cursor onto the drop-down box. When the drop-down menu pops up, move the
cursor to the target item and press Setto choose.

III

Safety Instructions

[9]

Interface Name : Steps of operation to open one interface is linked with a "-". For
example, "System Preset - Misc.Tools - Printers," refers to open the "System Preset"
interface first, then open the "Misc.Tools" interface, and the "Printers" interface.

Liability Limitation
[1]

[2]
[3]

[4]
[5]

[6]

[7]

If the equipment has to be sent back to the manufacturer or the manufacturer


authorized organizations for upgrade, modification or repair, please strictly follow the
manufacturer designated means of packaging and transportation.
The manufacturer shall not be liable for any failure or damage to the equipment
caused due to trouble of other makers equipment.
The manufacturer shall not be liable for any failure or damage to the equipment
in the course of servicing and repairing using parts or components other than the
manufacturer specified genuine parts.
The manufacturer shall not be liable for failure or damage to the equipment due to
non-compliance of the Instruction Manual.
The manufacturer shall not be liable for any damage or loss due to diagnostic result
or data obtained from the equipment by any persons who are not familiar with the
operation of the equipment.
The manufacture shall not be liable for any failure or damage to the equipment due
to the use of the equipment in power or environmental conditions that are not in
compliance with what are specified in the Instruction Manual.
The manufacturer shall not be liable for any failure or damage to the equipment
caused by force majeure such as earthquake, flood and lightning, etc.

Necessity of Periodical Maintenance


[1]

[2]
[3]

[4]

IV

In consideration of the usage and importance of medical devices, its essential to


maintain the equipment in the best conditions in terms of safety and reliability. The
manufacturer should not only do its best to control product quality in the
manufacturing process but also keep the equipment in the best condition in the
course of installation. However, safety and reliability of the equipment after delivery
and installation must be maintained by the user on a regular basis.
Please perform daily checkup and maintenance according to procedures described
in Maintenance Checkup.
After signing warranty contract with the manufacturer or the manufacturer
designated organizations, the user of the equipment is entitled to warranty services
within the warranty period. If necessary, please contact the manufacturer or
designated organizations.
When performing daily check-up periodical maintenance, please keep records of the
date, time, person and serviced content.

Safety Instructions

Service, Readjustment and Discard as Waste


[1]

[2]

[3]

Service Responsibility
When necessary, please entrust the manufacturer or the manufacturer designated
organizations to carry out service or readjustment. The service responsibility lies with
the person who carries out the service or adjustment.
Entrust of Service
If any abnormality occurs, please turn off the power immediately.
Please inform the manufacturer of the abnormality and service personnel will come
to perform check and service.
Discard
When discarding the main system or accessories of this equipment as waste, please
contact the manufacturer or the manufacturer designated organizations

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
DECLARATION .......................................................................................................................................................... II
MANUFACTURER AND SERVICE ORGANIZATION.......................................................................................... II
EU DELEGATE ........................................................................................................................................................... II
ISSUING RECORD AND DOCUMENT NUMBER ................................................................................................ II
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................................................................................... I
SYMBOLS AND DEFINITIONS IN THE MANUAL ............................................................................................................... I
SAFETY CRITERION SYMBOLS AND DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................... I
USERS RESPONSIBILITY FOR EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT............................................................................................. II
PROHIBITION OF EQUIPMENT ALTERATION ................................................................................................................ III
STIPULATIONS ............................................................................................................................................................ III
LIABILITY LIMITATION ............................................................................................................................................... IV
NECESSITY OF PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................... IV
SERVICE, READJUSTMENT AND DISCARD AS WASTE ....................................................................................................V
TABLE OF CONTENTS............................................................................................................................................ VI
CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................. 1
1.1

SYSTEM INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................. 1

1.2

SAFETY CATEGORY ......................................................................................................................................... 1

1.2.1

Electrical shock hazard ......................................................................................................................... 1

1.2.2

Water hazard......................................................................................................................................... 1

1.2.3

Anesthetic gas hazard .......................................................................................................................... 2

1.2.4

Probe Surface Temperature................................................................................................................. 2

1.3

Operation environment ......................................................................................................................... 2

1.3.2

Operation condition ............................................................................................................................... 2

1.3.3

Transportation and storage conditions ................................................................................................ 3

1.3.4

Transportation ....................................................................................................................................... 3

1.3.5

Storage .................................................................................................................................................. 3

1.4

POWER ............................................................................................................................................................ 3

1.4.1

Power connection ................................................................................................................................. 3

1.4.2

Specification of Fuse and Its Substitution ........................................................................................... 4

1.5

VI

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................... 2

1.3.1

INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................................. 5

1.5.1

Environment Condition ......................................................................................................................... 5

1.5.2

Operation environment ......................................................................................................................... 5

1.5.3

Operation Space ................................................................................................................................... 5

Table of Contents

1.5.4

Space for Ventilation ............................................................................................................................. 5

1.5.5

Power..................................................................................................................................................... 5

1.5.6

Installation, detaching and placing of probe ........................................................................................ 5

1.5.7

Prevention of Electromagnetic Radiation ............................................................................................ 5

1.5.8

Starting and Shutting down the Equipment ......................................................................................... 5

1.6

PRECAUTIONS IN OPERATION .......................................................................................................................... 7

1.7

PRECAUTIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SAFETY......................................................................................................... 8

1.8

PRECAUTIONS REGARDING ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBLITY (EMC) ......................................................... 8

1.9

PRECAUTIONS IN ULTRASOND ACOUSTIC POWER OUTPUT.............................................................................. 9

1.10

SCOPE OF APPLICATION ................................................................................................................................... 9

1.11

BIO-EFFECT OF ULTRASOUND EXAMINATION .................................................................................................. 9

1.12

PRACTICING STANDARD .................................................................................................................................. 9

1.13

RATING PLATE AND PROBE LABEL ................................................................................................................. 10

CHAPTER 2 PARAMETERS AND CONFIGURATIONS .................................................................................... 12


2.1

PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS ........................................................................................................................ 12

2.1.1

Probe Parameters............................................................................................................................... 12

2.1.2

Probe connector ................................................................................................................................. 12

2.1.3

Output devices supported .................................................................................................................. 12

2.1.4

Monitor ................................................................................................................................................. 12

2.1.5

Size ...................................................................................................................................................... 12

2.1.6

Weight.................................................................................................................................................. 12

2.1.7

Display Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 12

2.1.8

Gray scale ........................................................................................................................................... 12

2.1.9

Image Processing ............................................................................................................................... 12

2.1.10

Gain adjustment .................................................................................................................................. 12

2.1.11

CINE Loop ........................................................................................................................................... 12

2.1.12

Measurement and Calculation ........................................................................................................... 13

2.1.13

Storage ................................................................................................................................................ 13

2.1.14

Patient file management ..................................................................................................................... 13

2.1.15

Marks ................................................................................................................................................... 13

2.1.16

Varying frequency scanning ............................................................................................................... 13

2.1.17

Image direction.................................................................................................................................... 13

2.1.18

Image zoom ........................................................................................................................................ 13

2.1.19

Dynamic range .................................................................................................................................... 13

2.1.20

Biopsy Guide Line ............................................................................................................................... 13

2.1.21

System preset ..................................................................................................................................... 14

2.2

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .............................................................................................................................. 14

2.2.1

Standard configuration........................................................................................................................ 14

2.2.2

Optional configuration ......................................................................................................................... 14

CHAPTER 3 DAILY MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................................... 15


3.1

PRE-USE EXAMINATION................................................................................................................................. 15

3.2

IN-USE EXAMINATION ................................................................................................................................... 15

VII

Table of Contents

3.3

PERIODIC EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................................... 15

3.4

SYSTEM DATA BACKUP ................................................................................................................................. 16

3.5

REUSE AFTER LONG-TIME STORAGE ............................................................................................................. 16

3.6

MAINTENANCE OF THE MAIN UNIT ............................................................................................................... 16

3.7

CLEANING OF THE EQUIPMENT...................................................................................................................... 16

3.7.1

Cleaning of the Probe ......................................................................................................................... 16

3.7.2

Cleaning of the Control Panel ............................................................................................................ 17

3.7.3

Cleaning of the System Case............................................................................................................. 17

3.7.4

Cleaning of the Monitor....................................................................................................................... 17

3.7.5

Cleaning of the Video Printer ............................................................................................................. 17

3.7.6

Cleaning of the Trackball .................................................................................................................... 18

3.7.7

Cleaning of the DVD/CD Drive........................................................................................................... 18

3.8

FUNCTION CHECK ......................................................................................................................................... 18

3.9

WASTES DISPOSAL ........................................................................................................................................ 20

CHAPTER 4 USE AND MAINTENANCE OF PROBES ...................................................................................... 21


4.1

USE OF PROBES ............................................................................................................................................. 21

4.1.1

Handling of Probes ............................................................................................................................. 21

4.1.2

Peruse check of the Probe ................................................................................................................. 21

4.1.3

Connect Probe .................................................................................................................................... 22

4.1.4

Protection and Placement of Probe Cable ........................................................................................ 23

4.1.5

Select Probe ........................................................................................................................................ 23

4.1.6

Pre-cautions for the Use of Probe...................................................................................................... 24

4.2

NOTE ON ENDOCAVITARY PROBE IN GYNECOLOGY MEASUREMENT ............................................................. 24

4.2.1

Vaginal Examination ........................................................................................................................... 24

4.2.2

Rectal Examination ............................................................................................................................. 25

4.3

STORAGE OF PROBE ...................................................................................................................................... 25

4.4

ULTRASOUND COUPLING GEL ....................................................................................................................... 27

4.5

CLEANING AND STERILIZATION OF PROBE ..................................................................................................... 27

4.5.1

Cleaning and sterilization of probe ..................................................................................................... 27

4.5.2

Sterilization .......................................................................................................................................... 27

4.5.3

General cleaning process (non-derogatory) ...................................................................................... 29

4.5.4

Cleaning and sterilization of endocavitary transducer ...................................................................... 29

4.6

NOTE ON PROBE PROTECTION LEVEL ........................................................................................................... 30

CHAPTER 5 PARTS AND FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................... 31


5.1

MAIN STRUCTURE ......................................................................................................................................... 31

5.2

PERIPHERAL DEVICES ................................................................................................................................... 32

5.2.1
5.3

Layout of the peripheral panel ......................................................................................................... 32

CONTROL PANEL ........................................................................................................................................... 33

CHAPTER 6 INSTRUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 38
6.1

MOVE THE EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................................. 38

6.1.1

VIII

Pre-move Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 38

Table of Contents

6.1.2

Procedures for Moving the Equipment .............................................................................................. 38

6.1.3

Precautions for Moving the Equipment .......................................................................................... 38

6.2

ADJUSTMENT OF MONITOR ........................................................................................................................... 38

6.3

INSTALLATION OF VIDEO PRINTER ................................................................................................................ 39

6.4

STARTING THE EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................................... 40

6.4.1

Connecting to Power .......................................................................................................................... 40

6.4.2

Starting ................................................................................................................................................ 40

6.5

ADJUSTING EQUIPMENT AND SETTING PARAMETERS .................................................................................... 40

6.6

END OF USE .................................................................................................................................................. 40

CHAPTER 7 OPERATION GUIDE ......................................................................................................................... 41


7.1

SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................... 41

7.2

BASIC DISPLAY MODE................................................................................................................................... 41

7.2.1

Entering and Switch of Basic Mode ................................................................................................ 41

7.2.2

Main Display Screen in B Mode ......................................................................................................... 41

7.2.3

Main Display Screen in B/B Mode ..................................................................................................... 43

7.2.4

Main Display screen in 4B Mode ....................................................................................................... 43

7.2.5

Main Display screen in B/M Mode ..................................................................................................... 44

7.2.6

Main Display screen in M Mode ......................................................................................................... 44

7.3

FUNCTION MENU BUTTONS FOR IMAGE ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................. 45

7.3.1

B Mode Menu in Real Time State ................................................................................................... 45

7.3.2

B/B Mode Menu in Real Time State .................................................................................................. 48

7.3.3

4B Mode Menu in Real Time State .................................................................................................... 49

7.3.4

B/M Mode and M Mode Menu in Real Time State............................................................................ 49

7.3.5

B Mode Menu in Freeze State ........................................................................................................... 50

7.3.6

Menu Button in B/B, B/M and M mode in Freeze State .................................................................. 51

7.4

FREQUENCY, DEPTH AND ELECTRONIC FOCUS ............................................................................................... 51

7.4.1

Frequency........................................................................................................................................... 51

7.4.2

Depth ................................................................................................................................................... 52

7.4.3

Focus................................................................................................................................................... 52

7.5

CINE STORE AND CINE SEARCH..................................................................................................................... 52

7.5.3

Image Store ................................................................................................................................. 52


CINE Loop ................................................................................................................................... 52
CINE Store................................................................................................................................... 53

7.5.4

Image Storage Operation ................................................................................................................... 53

7.5.5

Operation of Cine Store .................................................................................................................... 53

7.5.1
7.5.2

7.6

PAN ZOOM ................................................................................................................................................... 55

7.7

GAIN ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................................................................................... 55

7.7.1

Adjustment of Total Gain .................................................................................................................... 55

7.7.2

TGCTime Gain Control ............................................................................................................... 56

7.8

GUIDE ........................................................................................................................................................... 57

7.9

CALIBRATING THE NEEDLE-GUIDED BRACKET .............................................................................................. 58

CHAPTER 8 SYSTEM PRESET ............................................................................................................................. 59

IX

Table of Contents

8.1

PROBES ......................................................................................................................................................... 60

8.2

GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................... 61

8.3

DEVICE ......................................................................................................................................................... 64

8.4

NETWORK ..................................................................................................................................................... 68

8.5

DICOM ........................................................................................................................................................ 71

8.6

STORAGE ....................................................................................................................................................... 72

8.7

APPLICATION SETTING .................................................................................................................................. 73

8.7.1

Edit Data-Image .................................................................................................................................. 75

8.7.2

Edit Data - Display .............................................................................................................................. 79

8.7.3

Edit Data - Body Mark......................................................................................................................... 80

8.7.4

Edit Data - Measurement ................................................................................................................... 84

8.7.5

Edit Data - Annotation......................................................................................................................... 86

8.8

OBSTETRIC TABLES ....................................................................................................................................... 88

8.8.1

Obstetric Tables InterfaceGA Table.......................................................................................... 88

8.8.2

Obstetric Tables Growth Table ...................................................................................................... 90

8.8.3

Check Table...................................................................................................................................... 91

8.8.4

Create user-defined Table ............................................................................................................... 92

8.9

FETAL PARAMETER ........................................................................................................................................ 93

8.9.1

Details of the Fetal Parameter Interface ............................................................................................ 93

8.9.2

Set obstetric measurement region .................................................................................................. 96

8.9.3

Set obstetric measurement method................................................................................................ 97

8.9.4

Calculation Equation ........................................................................................................................... 98

8.10

BACKUP DATA ............................................................................................................................................... 99

8.11

MISC.TOOLS................................................................................................................................................ 101

8.11.1

Upgrade ............................................................................................................................................. 103

8.11.2

Set Biopsy Guide Line ...................................................................................................................... 104

8.11.3

Printers .............................................................................................................................................. 106

CHAPTER 9 NEW PATIENT .................................................................................................................................. 110


CHAPTER 10 PATIENT DATA .............................................................................................................................. 114
10.1

LIST .............................................................................................................................................................115

10.2

TAGS ............................................................................................................................................................119

10.3

SEARCH ....................................................................................................................................................... 120

10.4

IMAGES ....................................................................................................................................................... 122

10.5

PATIENT INFORMATION ................................................................................................................................ 125

10.6

REPORT ....................................................................................................................................................... 125

10.7

MEASUREMENT & CALCULATION ............................................................................................................... 127

CHAPTER 11 BASIC MEASUREMENT .............................................................................................................. 128


11.1

BASIC MEASUREMENT METHOD ................................................................................................................. 128

11.1.1

Instruction on relevant measurement buttons ................................................................................. 128

11.1.2

Measure Distance ............................................................................................................................. 129

11.1.3

Measure Angle .................................................................................................................................. 130

Table of Contents

11.1.4

Measure Trace .................................................................................................................................. 130

11.1.5

Measure Ellipse................................................................................................................................. 131

11.1.6

Measure Volume ............................................................................................................................... 132

11.1.7

Display measurement result .......................................................................................................... 134

11.1.8

Cancel measurement ....................................................................................................................... 134

11.2

MEASURE DISTANCE IN B MODE AND B/B MODE ........................................................................................ 135

11.2.1

Distance Measurement Menu in B Mode and B/B Mode .......................................................... 135

11.2.2

Distance ............................................................................................................................................ 136

11.2.3

Angle ................................................................................................................................................. 136

11.2.4

RatioDistance ........................................................................................................................... 136

11.2.5

StenosisDistance ..................................................................................................................... 138

11.3

MEASURE DISTANCE IN B/M MODE AND M MODE ..................................................................................... 139

11.3.1

Distance measurement menu in B/M, M mode ........................................................................... 140

11.3.2

Heart Rate ........................................................................................................................................ 140

11.3.3

Time................................................................................................................................................... 141

11.3.4

Slope ................................................................................................................................................. 142

11.3.5

Distance ............................................................................................................................................ 143

11.3.6

RatioDistance ........................................................................................................................... 143

11.4

MEASURE AREA IN B AND B/B MODES ........................................................................................................ 144

11.4.1

Distance measurement menu in B mode and B/B mode ........................................................ 144

11.4.2

Trace ................................................................................................................................................. 145

11.4.3

Ellipse ................................................................................................................................................ 145

11.4.4

Measure Volume ............................................................................................................................. 146

11.4.5

Ratio[TraceArea].............................................................................................................................. 146

11.4.6

Ratio[TraceGirth] ............................................................................................................................. 148

11.4.7

Ratio[EllipseArea] ............................................................................................................................ 150

11.4.8

Ratio[EllipseGirth]............................................................................................................................ 151

11.4.9

Stenosis (TraceArea) ...................................................................................................................... 153

11.4.10

Stenosis (TraceGirth) .................................................................................................................. 155

11.4.11

Stenosis [EllipseArea] ................................................................................................................. 156

11.4.12

Stenosis [EllipseGirth]................................................................................................................. 158

CHAPTER 12 GYNECOLOGY MEASUREMENT .............................................................................................. 161


12.1

BRIEF INTRODUCTION TO GYNECOLOGY MEASUREMENT ........................................................................... 161

12.1.1

Introduction to Gynecology Measurement Functions ................................................................ 161

12.1.2

Operation Procedure of Gynecology Measurement................................................................... 162

12.1.3

Menu Details of Gynecology Measurement ................................................................................ 162

12.1.4

Exit Gynecology Measurement ..................................................................................................... 164

12.2

CONTENT OF GYNECOLOGY MEASUREMENT............................................................................................... 164

12.2.1

Uterus................................................................................................................................................ 164

12.2.2

Cervix ................................................................................................................................................ 165

12.2.3

Endometrium .................................................................................................................................... 166

12.2.4

Left Ovary, Right Ovary .................................................................................................................. 166

XI

Table of Contents

12.2.5

L-Follicle, R-Follicle ......................................................................................................................... 167

CHAPTER 13 OBSTETRICS MEASUREMENT ................................................................................................. 168


13.1

BRIEF INTRODUCTION TO OBSTETRICS MEASUREMENT .............................................................................. 168

13.1.1

Ultrasound Examination in Modern Obstetrics ........................................................................... 168

13.1.2

Introduction to obstetrics measurement functions ...................................................................... 169

13.1.3

Operation Procedure of Obstetrics Measurement ...................................................................... 170

13.1.4

Realize Switch Between Calculating GA (gestation age) and Calculating FW (fetal weight)

and AFI (amniotic fluid index) Through Obstetrics Measurement Menu ................................................ 171
13.1.5
13.2

Exit Obstetrics Measurement ........................................................................................................ 171

OBSTETRICS MEASUREMENT CALCULATING GA AND EDC...................................................................... 171

13.2.1

Basic Knowledge of estimating gestation age ............................................................................ 171

13.2.2

Obstetrics Measurement Menu Details for Calculating GA and EDC .................................. 172

13.2.3

Obstetrics Measurement Directly Calculate DGA/EDC .......................................................... 174

13.2.4

Obstetrics Measurement General Description of Calculating DGA and EDC ..................... 175

13.3

OBSTETRICS MEASUREMENT CALCULATE FW AND AFI........................................................................... 176

13.3.1

Obstetrics Measurement Menu Details of Calculating FW and AFI ...................................... 176

13.3.2

Obstetrics Measurement General Introduction to Calculating AFI ....................................... 178

13.3.3

Obstetrics Measurement General Introduction to Calculating FW ....................................... 178

CHAPTER 14 UROLOGY MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................................... 180


14.1

BRIEF INTRODUCTION TO UROLOGY MEASUREMENT .................................................................................. 180

14.1.1

Introduction to Urology Measurement Functions ........................................................................ 180

14.1.2

Urology Measurement Operation Procedure .............................................................................. 181

14.1.3

Menu Details of Urology Measurement........................................................................................ 181

14.1.4

Exit Urology Measurement............................................................................................................. 183

14.2

CONTENT OF UROLOGY MEASUREMENT ..................................................................................................... 184

14.2.1

Prostate V ......................................................................................................................................... 184

14.2.2

Trans Zone V.................................................................................................................................... 185

14.2.3

Bladder V .......................................................................................................................................... 185

14.2.4

Urine V .............................................................................................................................................. 186

14.3

OTHER MEASUREMENTS ............................................................................................................................. 187

14.3.1

Slice V ............................................................................................................................................... 187

14.3.2

HipJ.Angle ........................................................................................................................................ 189

CHAPTER 15 CARDIOLOGY MEASUREMENT ............................................................................................... 192


15.1

BRIEF INTRODUCTION TO CARDIOLOGY MEASUREMENT ............................................................................ 192

15.1.1

Introduction to Cardiology Measurement Functions .................................................................. 192

15.1.2

Operation Procedure of Cardiology Measurement ..................................................................... 193

15.1.3

Menu Details of Cardiac Measurement........................................................................................ 193

15.1.4

Exit Cardiac Measurement............................................................................................................. 196

15.2

CONTENT OF CARDIAC MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................................... 196

15.2.1

Measurement Menu, Measured Items, Input Items and Calculated Items of

LV-Volume

Measurement in B Mode and B/B Mode ...................................................................................................... 196

XII

Table of Contents

15.2.2

Measurement Menu, Measured items, Input Items and Calculated Items of LV-Function

Measurement in B Mode and B/B Mode ...................................................................................................... 196


15.2.3

Measurement Menu, Measured Items, Input Items and Calculated Items of B-LV

Measurement in B Mode and B/B Mode ...................................................................................................... 197


15.2.4

Measurement Menu, Measured Items, Input Items and Calculated Items of LV-function

Measurement in B/M Mode and M Mode ..................................................................................................... 197


15.2.5

Measurement Menu, Measured Items, Input Items and Calculated Items of Volume

Measurement in B/M Mode and M Mode ..................................................................................................... 197


15.2.6

Measurement Menu, Measured Items, Input items and Calculated Items of LV-Volume

Measurement in B/M Mode and M mode ..................................................................................................... 198


15.2.7

Explanation of Measurement Parameters and the Menu Showing the Parameters ............. 198

15.2.8

Explanation of Calculated Parameters, Formula and the Menu Showing the Calculated

Parameters ....................................................................................................................................................... 199


15.3

LV-VOLUME MEASUREMENT IN B MODE AND B/B MODE .......................................................................... 201

15.3.1

Pombo, Teichholz and Gibson....................................................................................................... 201

15.3.2

S.Plane Ellipse ................................................................................................................................. 202

15.3.3

Biplane Ellipse ................................................................................................................................. 202

15.3.4

Bullet ................................................................................................................................................. 203

15.3.5

Simpson ............................................................................................................................................ 204

15.4

LV-FUNCTION IN B MODE AND B/B MODE ................................................................................................. 205

15.4.1
15.5

LV-Pombo, LV-Teichholz and LV-Gibson ..................................................................................... 205

B-LV MEASUREMENT IN B MODE AND B/B MODE ..................................................................................... 206

15.5.1

Long Axis .......................................................................................................................................... 206

15.5.2

Wall L-Axis........................................................................................................................................ 206

15.5.3

Short Axis ......................................................................................................................................... 207

15.5.4

Cardio-Apex ..................................................................................................................................... 207

15.6

LV-FUNCTION MEASUREMENT IN B/M MODE AND M MODE ...................................................................... 208

15.6.1
15.7

LV-Pombo, LV-Teichholz and LV-Gibson ..................................................................................... 208

VOLUME MEASUREMENT IN B/M MODE AND M MODE .............................................................................. 209

15.7.1

MVMitral Valve ......................................................................................................................... 209

15.7.2

AVAortic Valve ......................................................................................................................... 209

15.7.3

TVTricuspid Valve.................................................................................................................... 210

15.7.4

PVPulmonary Valve ................................................................................................................. 211

15.8

LV-VOLUME MEASUREMENT IN B/M MODE AND M MODE ........................................................................ 212

15.8.1

Pombo, Teichholz and Gibson....................................................................................................... 212

CHAPTER 16 MEASUREMENT REPORT .......................................................................................................... 214


16.1

OBSTETRICS REPORT ................................................................................................................................... 215

16.2

GYNECOLOGIC MEASUREMENT REPORT ..................................................................................................... 219

16.3

CARDIAC MEASUREMENT REPORT .............................................................................................................. 221

16.4

UROLOGY MEASUREMENT REPORT ............................................................................................................. 226

CHAPTER 17 MARKS ............................................................................................................................................ 229


17.1

TEXT ........................................................................................................................................................... 229

XIII

Table of Contents

17.1.1

Display and Input Text .................................................................................................................... 229

17.1.2

Delete text ........................................................................................................................................ 230

17.1.3

Exit Text ............................................................................................................................................ 230

17.1.4

Text Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 230

17.2

BODY MARK ............................................................................................................................................... 239

17.2.1

Display of Body Mark ...................................................................................................................... 240

17.2.2

Move body mark and probe mark ................................................................................................. 241

17.2.3

Adjust angle of probe mark ............................................................................................................ 241

17.2.4

Exit Body Mark................................................................................................................................. 241

17.2.5

Body Mark Menu ............................................................................................................................. 242

17.3

ARROW ....................................................................................................................................................... 243

17.3.1

Display and Input Arrow Marks ..................................................................................................... 243

17.3.2

Delete Arrow Mark........................................................................................................................... 243

17.3.3

Exit Arrow Mark ............................................................................................................................... 243

CHAPTER 18 COMMON QUESTIONS................................................................................................................ 244


18.1

SOME FACILITY FAILURES AND ELIMINATE METHODS .................................................................................. 244

18.2

OTHER FUNCTIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 244

18.3

PUNCTURE GUIDE LINES .............................................................................................................................. 245

18.3.1

Guide line image can not coincide with puncture needles ........................................................ 245

18.3.2

Guide line direction ......................................................................................................................... 245

18.4

OTHERS ....................................................................................................................................................... 245

18.4.1 Customer Service Center ................................................................................................................... 245


18.4.2

Note ................................................................................................................................................... 245

APPENDIX ................................................................................................................................................................ 246


APPENDIX A OBSTETRICS MEASUREMENT REFERENCE ......................................................................................... 246
APPENDIX B FETAL WEIGHT MEASUREMENT FORMULA ....................................................................................... 251
APPENDIX C ACOUSTIC OUTPUT REPORTING TABLE FOR PROBE OF TH-100 ........................................................ 252
APPENDIX D GUIDANCE AND TEKNOVAS DECLARATION ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS ...................... 265
APPENDIX E GUIDANCE AND TEKNOVAS DECLARATION ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY ....................... 266
APPENDIX F GUIDANCE AND TEKNOVAS DECLARATION ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY ....................... 267
APPENDIX G RECOMMENDED SEPARATION DISTANCES BETWEEN PORTABLE AND MOBILE RF COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT AND TH-100 ......................................................................................................................................... 268

XIV

Chapter 1 Product Introduction

Chapter 1 Product Introduction


1.1

System Introduction
TH-100 is a economical full-digital black and white ultrasonic diagnostic imaging system.
Equipped with advanced high-precision DBF (digital beam former), DRF (dynamic
receiving focusing), RDA (real-time dynamic aperture) and dynamic apordization, the
system provide images that look more real and richer in details. Together with powerful
standard PC platform and ergonomic control panel, the system could easily meet
increasing clinical diagnostic demand.
Supporting various types of probe including linear and convex, TH-100 can be used in
multiple ultrasound diagnosis like abdomen, gynecology, obstetrics, pediatrics, vascular,
cardiology and urology.
Except for superb image quality, TH-100 also provides users with various measuring
functions. In addition to length, area, circumference and volume, it also provides special
measurements in obstetrics, gynecology, cardiology and urology. The system is
equipped with cine loop, patient report and image management functions. It also
supports DICOM3.0.
TH-100 is mainly composed of the main system, monitor, convex probe, linear
probe(option) and printer(option).

1.2
1.2.1

Safety Category
Electrical shock hazard
Type BF, Class I

When using a Type BF equipment, if connecting the device that is


leaking electricity or that is in disorder with the patient, it may cause
electrical shock. For this purpose, examinations must be carried out
on devices that are used with the ultrasound machine.

1.2.2

Water hazard
-Generic Equipment
Do not use this equipment where it is exposed to water spray or
splash since the equipment is not water-proof at all.
Do not splash water on or into the equipment to avoid danger such as
electrical shock. In the case of splash, please contact the customer
service center of the manufacturer.
1

Chapter 1 Product Introduction

1.2.3

Anesthetic gas hazard


-This equipment is not to be used in the presence of anesthetic gas mixed with air, O2 or
N2O.
Never use this equipment in an atmosphere where inflammable or
combustible gas is present since otherwise it may cause explosion.

1.2.4

Probe Surface Temperature


The surface temperature of the probe shall not exceed 41 when the environmental
temperature is 25. The rise in probe surface temperature shall not exceed 16 when
the environmental temperature is below 25.

1.3
1.3.1

Environmental requirements
Operation environment
Please make sure to install and operate the equipment in the following environmental
conditions.
-Ambient temperature : 040
-Relative humidity: 90%subject to condensation
-Atmospheric pressure: 700hPa~1060hPa
Electromagnetic wave can cause malfunction or breakdown of the
equipment. Do not operate the equipment close to heating sources,
strong magnetic field or devices generating high-frequency signals.
Shielding protections are required when necessary.

1.3.2

Operation condition
This equipment is not an AP/APG category machine, nor the
explosion-proof type. Therefore, do not use it in an environment
where toxic gas or inflammable gas is present.
1 This equipment is not water-proof. Therefore, please do not use this
equipment in the following environment:
Where water or other liquid splash is present
Where heat generating devices such as heaters or humidifiers are present
where humidity is high
where vapor is present
where there is saline air
Note: Probe head and probe cable are made to be IP-protected water proof.
2 It is also prohibited to use the equipment in the following places
where it is dusty or sandy
where it is subject to excessive shock or vibration

Chapter 1 Product Introduction

where electric voltage fluctuates abnormally


where electric voltage drops excessively under overload
where it is exposed to direct sun shine
3 Please make sure to use the equipment on a horizontal floor. If the
equipment is put on a floor tilting more than 10, it may fall down.

1.3.3

Transportation and storage conditions


This equipment should be stored in the below environmental conditions:
-Ambient temperature: -1055
-Relative humidity: 8020
-Atmospheric pressure: 500hPa1060hPa
Moreover, please make sure to store packaged equipment in an indoor environment
where there is no corrosive gas and where it is well ventilated.

!
Warning

1.3.4

Please make sure to use the equipment in a dry environment and avoid
water-dripping conditions. When the equipment is moved from a cold
environment to a warm one, vapor could condense into water drops and
cause short circuit if the equipment is put into use right away. In this
situation, please dont turn on the equipment until after having placed it in
a warm environment for 4 hours.

Transportation
The packaging carton of the equipment complies with the IEC standard of EU. With
simplified vibration protection, the equipment is suitable for transportation by air,
railway, road and ship. In the course of transportation, the followings should be
avoided, such as rain, snow, inversion and collision, etc.

1.3.5

Storage
-The equipment should be stored in a dry and clean indoor environment.
-The indoor environment should be well-ventilated, and free of direct sunshine and
corrosive gas.
-If the equipment has been put in storage for over 6 months, it should be taken out of
the packaging, powered on for 4 hours and then put back in the direction indicated
on the packaging carton.
-Do not pile up the equipment more than one layer. Do not put the equipment close
to floor, walls or roof top.

1.4
1.4.1

Power
Power connection
The power case is shown as below:

Chapter 1 Product Introduction

Figure1.4.1-1 power case


1 Rated supply input: 110V~240V
2 Frequency: 50/60Hz
3 Rated power Input: 200VA
4 Power cord:
The power cord of this equipment is a 3-wire cable with a protective earth terminal. To
prevent power shock, please make sure to directly connect the power cord to a 3-wire power
outlet with a medical grounding terminal (less than 0.1 of grounding resistance). Please do
not use a power outlet which doesnt have a medical grounding terminal.

Electrical power should be maintained stable. The equipment may be


subject to damage in uncertain or frequent outages.

1.4.2

Specification of Fuse and Its Substitution


This equipment uses a time-delay fuse. Please use the equipped substitute fuse when
changing. The specifications of the fuse is 2A/250V, 5mm20mm2
Please make sure to use the specified fuse. Otherwise, accident would occur.

Figure1.4.2-1 Changing Fuse


4

Chapter 1 Product Introduction

Remove the fuse cover by turning anticlockwise and take out the old fuse.
Put in the new fuse and put the fuse cover on by turning clockwise.

1.5

Installation
TH-100 should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment
and that if adjacent or stacked use is necessary, TH-100 should be
observed to verify normal operation in the configuration in which it will
used.
Please make sure to install and operate the equipment in the following conditions:

1.5.1

Environment Condition
Please follow the requirements in 1.3.1 Operation Environment.

1.5.2

Operation environment
Please follow the demand in 1.3.2 Operation Condition.

1.5.3

Operation Space
Please make sure to leave a space of above 10cm around the equipment.

1.5.4

Space for Ventilation


A fan is equipped in the back of the equipment. Please keep a space of over 10cm in the
rear when installing the equipment for ventilation. Otherwise, temperature rise may
cause equipment malfunction.
Besides, please make sure not to block the vent-hole.

1.5.5

Power
Please follow the requirements in 1.5 Power.

1.5.6

Installation, detaching and placing of probe


Please follow the requirements in 4.1 Use of probe.

1.5.7

Prevention of Electromagnetic Radiation


Strong rays or electromagnetic waves will cause mal-operation of the equipment or
noises on images.
Please make sure to keep the equipment away from such sources of disturbance.
Note that probes used inside the body will be more affected by electronmagnetic
radiation than those used ouside the body.

1.5.8

Starting and Shutting down the Equipment

Chapter 1 Product Introduction

Figure 1.5.8-1 Control Panel Locked Switch

Figure 1.5.8-2 Boot switch


1.
2.
6

Press the control panel locked switch (whose location is shown in figure 1.5.8-1,
and open control panel.
Please check if the above operations have been correctly completed.

Chapter 1 Product Introduction

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

1.6

Plug the system power cord into the power outlet.


Put on the general power switch of the equipment (press the power switch on
the power case toward ON).
Turn on the boot switch (the position of the boot switch is indicated in Figure
3.2).
Press preset to set system preset and all parameters of the system.
Save the settings. System installation completed.
Close the control pane and press the control panel locked switch to lock it.
Turn off the boot switch. Before shutting down, the system will check if the file
system is complete, save all settings from this operation and automatically turn
off the power of the equipment.

Precautions in Operation
1. Do not alter the system or probes.
2. When any abnormality occurs to the equipment, turn off the power switch
immediately; pull the power cord out of the socket. Then, contact the manufacturer or
the manufacturer designated organizations.
3. When the equipment is not in use for a long period of time, please turn off the power
switch and put on the protective cover.
4. When not performing diagnosis, please set the equipment in the freeze state to
prevent the probe from turning bad from running without load.
5. Make sure that the power switch of the equipment is well connected. Let the system
run steadily and do not turn the equipment on and off frequently.
6. If the system has to be restarted after being shut down, please wait at least half a
minute to do so. Otherwise, intelligent check on the system power would tell that the
power is unsteady and therefore refuse to start the system.
7. Please use the manufacturer designated CD-R/W, video printers and digital printers.
8. When working on the CD-R/W, do operate when the drivers access light is turned off.
Otherwise, damage may occur to the driver or the CD disc.
9. Make sure to use reliable CD discs in order to guarantee data safety.
10. Do not block the ventilation outlets on the front panel and the rear panel to prevent
equipment failure.
11. Once the equipment locks itself, please turn off the Boot Switch to automatically
shut down the equipment and do cut off power. If the equipment still couldnt shut
down automatically one minute after turning off the Boot Switch, please turn off the
General Power Switch on the bottom of the equipment. Then restart the system
after half a minute.
12. The manufacturer shall not be held responsible for date loss on the ultrasound
equipment, the electronic storage media and the PC which results from
mal-operation or accidents. Please do backup important data.
13. Please check and clean the dust filter on the power ventilation outlet once every
week.

Chapter 1 Product Introduction

14. Do not operate the power switch with figures stuck with ultrasound gel. Wipe the gel
off hands before operating the power switch.
15. Please wipe off stains on the system case and control panel with cloth soaked with
neutral detergent first, then with soft dry cloth. Never use organic solvent such as a
diluting agent.
16. Please refer to the operation manual of the printer for the use and change of
consumables such as printing paper and printing ribbon.
17. Do not touch the silica gel buttons on the control panel with figures stuck with liquid
containing silicon oil. Otherwise, the silica gel button may swell and make it hard to
press down.
18. Please refer to Chapter 4 Use and Maintenance of Probes for precautions on
probes.

1.7

Precautions for Electrical Safety


1. According to the type of electrical shock protection, this ultrasound diagnostic
equipment is classified into Category I, Type B/BF of International Medical Electrical
Safety Standard IEC60601-1. To prevent electrical shock, please use a socket with 3
protective earth terminals (The earthing resistance should be less than 10).
2. Please do not remove the equipment case that has been fixed with screws. If
remove the case and touch the internal of the equipment, there might be danger of
electrical shock. If it is necessary to conduct repair or service of the internal, please
make sure to contact the manufacturer or the manufacturer designated
organizations for professional assistance.
3. Please make sure to remove all electro-cardiological cables on the patient when
using operating devices that generate high-frequency waves.
4. Please do not use the electro-cardiology function when patient wears cardiac
pacemaker or other devices that may cause electrical stimulation.

1.8

Precautions regarding Electromagnetic Compatiblity (EMC)


1. As a medical electrical equipment, TH-100 needs special precautions regarding
EMC and needs to be installed and put into service according to the EMC
information provided in Appendix D, E and F;
2. As a medical electrical equipment, TH-100 can be affected by nearby portable and
mobile RF communications equipment. Separation distances need to be used
according to the recommendations provided in Appendix G.
Use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified,
with the exception of transducers and cables sold by Teknova of TH-100
as replacement parts for internal components, may result in increased
EMISSIONS or decreased IMMUNITY of TH-100.

Chapter 1 Product Introduction

1.9

Precautions in Ultrasond Acoustic Power Output


This ultrasound acoustic power on this equipment is as low as harmless to humans.
However, fetuses (particularly those on the early stage of gestation) are sensitive to
ultrasound. Therefore, to minimize the negative effect of ultrasound when examining
fetuses, please pay attention to these followings:
1. Set the ultrasound acoustic power to the lowest level. If the image quality is not ideal,
improve the image not by lifting ultrasound acoustic power, but by changing
sensitivity through turningGainor by adjusting the 8 TGC levers.
2. To avoid unnecessary ultrasound scanning of human body, press Freezeto freeze
the image immediately aftering obtaining the image.
3. With the same ultrasound acoustic power, its easier to obtain a clearer figure in M
mode than in B mode. Therefore, in M mode, please set the ultrasound acoustic
power to the lowest level.

1.10 Scope of Application


This equipment is designed to perform analysis and diagnosis of human anatomic
cross-section by clinical physicians and other qualified personnel. Its mainly used to
conduct ultrasonic diagnosis on visceral organs, superficial tissues, heart and peripheral
vascular in chest/breast, abdomen and pelvic cavity.

!
Notice

Ultrasound will hurt human body;


Please do not apply the probes of this equipment on scopes not
involved in this manual.

1.11 Bio-effect of Ultrasound Examination


The US Medical Ultrasound Association has approved the safety of clinical application of
ultrasound. Up to date, there has been no reports of negative effect resulting from
medical ultrasound examinations. In the mean time, however, the US Medical
Ultrasound Association points out that ultrasound examination must be carried out with
care. Negative effects may occur in case of ultra large acoustic power.

!
Notice

The ALARA principle must be observed. That is, to lower the acoustic
power and reduce the examination duration as far as possible.

1.12 Practicing Standard


This equipment is designed and manufactured strictly following the National Standard
EU IEC.
The environmental test of this equipment complies with the requirements in the
Climatical Environment Test II and Mechanical Environment Test II in GB/T14710-1993
Environmental Requirements and Experiment Methods for Medical Electrical Devices.
9

Chapter 1 Product Introduction

!
Notice

Only technicians from the manufacturer or the manufacturer


authorized technicians are allowed to install and test the equipment
when delivered to the user.
It is prohibited that the user installs the equipment on his/her own.

Please perform pre-use checks and after-use service, periodical checks and
cleaning by the following procedures.
Install: Put the assembled equipment in a appropriate environment first. Then put
on peripheral devices.
Move: Moving of the assembled equipment should be carried out manually.

!
Notice

The equipment may be damaged or break down if it is not transported


as specified in this manual.
Please contact the manufacturer when the equipment has to be
transported on transportation vehicles.

1.13 Rating plate and Probe Label


Rating plate is located as shown in the below:

Figure 1.12-1 Rating plate Position

10

Chapter 1 Product Introduction

Figure 1.12-2 Rating plate

11

Chapter 2 Parameters and Configurations

Chapter 2 Parameters and Configurations


2.1 Performance Parameters
2.1.1

Probe Parameters
Type: Convex
Parameter: Nominal frequency :3.5MHz,R=50mm
Type: Linear
Parameter: Nominal frequency :7.5MHz
Type: Endocavity Convex Parameter: Nominal frequency : 6.5MHz,R=10mm

2.1.2

Probe connector
Probe connector:2.

2.1.3

Output devices supported


USB mobile storage, digital printer, video printer, LAN port(DICOM transmit port).

2.1.4

Monitor
10 line-by-line non-interlaced monitor with high definition and resolution.

2.1.5

Size
Control panel open: 648mmLength 297mmWidth 287mmHeight.
Control panel closed: 421mmLength 297mmWidth 290mmHeight

2.1.6

Weight
10kg (About).

2.1.7

Display Mode
B, B/B, B/M, M

2.1.8

Gray scale
256 grades

2.1.9

Image Processing
Line Average, Frame Average, Pre Gray, B/W Invert, Enhance, Contrast, Brightness,
Gamma.

2.1.10 Gain adjustment


0-100dB adjustable
TGC: 8-level adjustment.

2.1.11 CINE Loop


Automatic /manual play
12

Chapter 2 Parameters and Configurations

The CINE Loop frame is determined by system configuration.

2.1.12 Measurement and Calculation


B mode conventional measurement: distance, circumference, area, volume, angle, ratio,
stricture ratio and so on.
M mode conventional measurement: heart rate, time, distance, distance, speed, stricture
ratio and so on.
Gynecology measurement: womb, cervix, endometrial, ovary (left and right), ovarian
follicle (left and right) and so on.
Obstetrics measurement: gestational age, fetus weight, amniotic fluid depth index and
so on.
Cardiology measurement: left ventricle measurement, left ventricle function, and
ventricle thickness evaluation and so on.
Urology measurement: displacement volume, bladder capacity, residual urine output and
so on.
Other measurement: profile measurement, hip joint measurement and so on.
Users can customize other measurement.

2.1.13 Storage
Image storage, CINE Loop storage .

2.1.14 Patient file management


Medical record management, report printing, image video output (CD-ROM, USB) and
data input.

2.1.15 Marks
Character mark, body mark (90 types), arrow mark.

2.1.16 Varying frequency scanning


5-band varying frequency scanning.

2.1.17 Image direction


Images could flip up, flip down, flip to left, flip to right and rotate by 90.

2.1.18 Image zoom


Local image can be zoomed in and real-time displayed. The zoom radio is adjustable.

2.1.19 Dynamic range


7 level adjustable: 0~120Db.

2.1.20 Biopsy Guide Line


Probe corresponding biopsy-guide set up available

13

Chapter 2 Parameters and Configurations

2.1.21 System preset


System parameter preset: abdomen, gynecology, obstetrics, superficial, urology,
cardiology, self-defining 1~4 Obstetrics formula, text content, Default preset, system
upgrade, maintenance tools.

2.2 System configuration


2.2.1

Standard configuration
Main unit
Monitor
Electronic convex C3612-6MHz, nominal frequency 3.5 MHz, applicable in abdominal
examination
Accessories:
Ultrasound gel holder
1
Probe cable hanger
1
Instruction manual
1
Quick Operation Guide
1
Power cord
1
Fuse
2

2.2.2

Optional configuration
Electronic linear array probe: L553, 5-10MHz, nominal frequency 7.5 MHz
Endcavitary probe: E663, 4-9MHz, nominal frequency 6.5MHz
Electronic micro-convex: M201, 2.5-5 MHz, nominal frequency 3.5MHz
Biopsy Guide Line
Ultrasound report software: enables editing and printing out of standard
ultrasound examination report
6 CD burning software: enables burning and saving of stored images and CINE
Loop files onto CD discs
7 Dicom 3.0 transmission: namely Digital Imaging Communications in Medicine, a
protocol by which images and other information on different medical equipment
communicate with each other. Once the ultrasound equipment is connected to
PACS, it could transmit and receive required images and related information
through DICOM.
8 Real-time dynamic network transmission
9 Black and white video printer
10 Service tools
11 THI (Tissue Harmonic Imaging) software
1
2
3
4
5

14

Chapter 3 Daily Maintenance

Chapter 3 Daily Maintenance


Please perform pre-use examination, after-use service, periodic checkup and cleaning
according to the below regulations.

3.1 Pre-use Examination


Examination Period: Daily
Please perform the following examination before turning on the power of the equipment.
1 Check the sleeve of the power cord for damage or fall-off to avoid electrical
hazard.
2 Check the sleeve of the probe cable for damage or fall-off and the probe surface
for scratch to avoid electrical hazard.
3 Check the connection of peripheral devices such as the printer, etc.
Check if the connected devices are the manufacturer approved ones
Check if the power supply of peripheral devices comes from the auxiliary power
socket of the ultrasound equipment
Check if the total power supply of the peripherals is within the limit of the auxiliary
power socket of the ultrasound equipment
If any abnormalities occur, please contact the service department of the manufacturer or
the manufacturer designated organizations.

3.2 In-use Examination


Examination Period: Daily
Please perform the following examinations after turning on the power of the the
equipment
1 Check for abnormal sound or smell of burning. For any abnormalities, cut off the
power, pull the power cord out of the socket and contact the service department.
2 Check if the date and time display on the upper right of the image is correct. If
there is a big error in the date or time display, the PC CMOS battery inside the
equipment may have been used up.
In that case, please contact the service department of the manufacturer or the
manufacturer designated service organizations.
Please follow national or local regulations to dispose the detached battery
properly.

3.3 Periodic Examination


Examination Period: Monthly
Please perform the following examination once every month.
1 Check the probe cable and connector for abnormality
2 Check the power cord and other cables for abnormality
3 Check the control panel and keyboard for abnormality
15

Chapter 3 Daily Maintenance

4 Check the foot wheel brake for abnormality


For any abnormalities, please contact the service department of the manufacturer or the
manufacturer designated service organizations.

3.4 System Data Backup


Operation Period: Monthly
If patient data such as images and videos are frequently stored, they would gradually
occupy a large internal storage memory. It is suggested to sort out patient data on a
periodic basis, output or back up them to external storage media (USB, CD disc), as well
as delete those data that have been backed-up to avoid inadequate hard drive memory.
Periodic sorting out and backup are of particular importance in consideration of data loss
from hard drive damage.
Please back up data at least once every month.
Please refer to 8.10 Backup Data for details.

3.5 Reuse after Long-time Storage


If the equipment hasnt been used for a long time, please confirm that it is able to run
normally and safely before using it again.

3.6 Maintenance of the Main Unit

The operation environment of the main unit should comply with 1.3 Environmental
Requirements.
Turn on the power of the equipment twice, no less than one hour each time, if the
equipment is left unused for a long period of time.
Please do not randomly open the case of the equipment to clean the interior, nor
shake or disassemble the interior parts.
Shut the equipment down before cleaning the case of the equipment. Clean the
machine with alcohol cotton ball.
Do not start and shut down the equipment too often. Wait for at least I minute to
restart after shutting down.
The equipment should be placed on a flat floor. Do not put heavy stuff on top of the
machine.
Only professional service technicians are allowed to service the equipment.
Please perform regular checks on the control panel and keyboard.
Check the foot wheel brake on a regular basis.

3.7 Cleaning of the Equipment


3.7.1

Cleaning of the Probe


Operation Period: Daily
After the probe is used, wipe off the ultrasound coupling gel with soft paper tissue
or cloth. Otherwise, the probe may change color or deteriorate.
Do not wipe the probe with hard paper, cloth or crude paper to prevent the acoustic
lens from being damaged, or to prevent electrical shock.

16

Chapter 3 Daily Maintenance

Put the probe in the probe box if it is temporarily not in use. Do not hit or drop the
probe.
Please clean, and sterilize the probe by the method stipulated in 4.5 Probe
Cleaning and Sterilization.

3.7.2

Cleaning of the Control Panel


Operation Period: Daily
After use, wipe the gel off the control panel when the equipment is shut down.
Otherwise, the control panel may change color or deteriorate.

3.7.3

Cleaning of the System Case


Operation Period: Weekly
Please shut down the equipment first, pull the power cord out of the electrical
socket and then clean the system case.
Please wipe stains off first with cloth soaked with neutral detergent then with dry
cloth.

!
Notice

3.7.4

Do not use organic solvent such as diluting agent.


Do not directly apply liquid such as detergent on the equipment.
Do not splash liquid on the interior of the equipment, probe
connector or the control panel.

Cleaning of the Monitor


Operation Period: Weekly
Please shut down the equipment, pull the power cord out of the socket before
cleaning the monitor.
Please wipe stains off the surface of the monitor with dry soft cloth or soft cloth
soaked with glass cleaning fluid. Cleaning the top and side of the monitor is the
same as cleaning the equipment first wipe off stains with cloth soaked with
neutral detergent then wipe again with dry cloth.

!
Notice

3.7.5

Do not use organic solvent such as diluting agent.


Do not directly apply liquid such as detergent on the equipment
Do not use glass cleaning fluid containing hydrocarbon, which, if
used in the long term, would hurt the anti-reflection film on the
surface of the monitor.

Cleaning of the Video Printer


Operation Period: Weekly
Please shut down the equipment, pull the power cord out of the socket before
cleaning the video printer.
Please wipe the video printer with dry soft cloth.
Cleaning tissues equipped with the printer are the printer manufacturer designated
17

Chapter 3 Daily Maintenance

product. Please clean the magnetic head of the printer with such tissues. Refer to
the operation manual of the video printer for details.

3.7.6

Cleaning of the Trackball


Please shut down the equipment, pull the power cord out of the socket before
cleaning the trackball.
Please do not use wet cloth or detergent.
If water or detergent gets into the trackball, it might cause damage.
Wipe the stains or dust on the trackball with dry soft cloth.

3.7.7

Cleaning of the DVD/CD Drive


If DVD/CD drive is frequently used, please periodically clean the drive with cleaning
tools.

3.8 Function Check


Function check items are listed below. Please conduct periodic check as required. If
mistakes or breakdowns are found during such checks, please contact the manufacturer
or the manufacturer designated organizations.
Number
Item
1
Freeze check

5
6
7
8

18

Description
PressFreeze. Freeze image when the
button indicator lamp is on. Defreeze
image when the button indicator lamp is
off.
Switch between
Press B
B/B
,
,or B/Mrespectively
display modes
to enter the corresponding display
mode
Sample line in M PressB/Mto enter the B/M mode. Roll
mode
the trackball to check if the sample line
can be moved.
Image display
Put ultrasound gel on the probe, test the
probe against the ultrasound phantom
to
check if cross-section images are
shown.
Frequency
PushFrequencyto check if frequency
can be switched correctly.
Depth
Push Depthto check if depth can be
switched correctly
Focus
PushFocusto check if the focus
position can be switched correctly
Zoom
In real-time scanning state, press
Zoomto check if the image can be

Note

Refer to 7.2
for details

Refer to 7.4.1
for details
Refer to 7.4.2
for details
Refer to 7.4.3
for details
Refer to 7.6
for details

Chapter 3 Daily Maintenance

zoomed
9

10
11

12
13

14

15

16

17

18

19
20
21

Image Storage

Freeze image. Press Image Store.


When the button indicator lamp is on,
the system shows store image. Then
pressPatient Datato check if imagea
have been stored.
Cine Search
Freeze image. Press Cine Search to
call Cine search Function menu.
Cine Store
Freeze image. Press Cine Store.
When the button indicator lamp is on,
the system shows cine store. Then
pressPatient Datato check if the cine
video has been stored.
Gain
TurnGainto check if Gain can be
adjusted
TGC
Push the eight-band TGC levers one by
one to check if the image brightness is
changed accordingly
Check
switch Press Application to access each
between
application mode
application
modes
Biopsy guide line Switch to probes that are equipped with
the biopsy guide function. Press
Guide
to check if the biopsy guide line is
shown.
Probe Switch
Press Probe 1,Probe 2to realize
probe switch when probes are
connected.
Basic
Press Distance,Areato check if
measurement
the
corresponding
measurement
functions
functions can be realized
Mark
Press BodyMark , Arrow and
Characterrespectively to check if the
corresponding bodymarks can be
accessed
Report
Press Report to check if the
measurement report can be viewed
Connectors
of Check if connectors of CD-R/W or
USB
USB flash drive work properly
Peripherals
Check if connected peripheral devices

Refer
to
7.5.1 ,7.5.4
for details

Refer to 7.5.2
Refer to 7.5.3,
7.5.5
for
details

Refer to 7.7.1
Refer to 7.7.2

Refer to 7.9

Refer to 7.11

Refer to 4.1.5

Refer to Ch11

Refer to Ch17

Refer to Ch 16

Refer to the

19

Chapter 3 Daily Maintenance

such as color printer, b/w video printer


work properly

user manual of
each peripheral
device

3.9 Wastes Disposal


Wastes may cause damage. Discarded plastic cases or bags are general plastic wastes.
Please strictly follow the local regulations for disposal of wastes.

20

Chapter 4 Use and Maintenance of Probes

Chapter 4 Use and Maintenance of Probes


Please read carefully this Instruction Manual to make sure the
probes of this equipment work steadily in the long run and bring
top-line image qualities.

4.1 Use of Probes


4.1.1

Handling of Probes
Endurability of the probe has already been taken into consideration in the process of
design and manufacturing. Still, careful handling of the probe is required. Mal-operation,
drop or hit of the probe would severely damage the transducer head and the
piezocrystals inside the transducer. Scratch, cut, or damage to the transducer head,
probe cable, or probe cable sleeve would ruin the electrical safty of the probe.
When probes are not used, put them in the special probe holders on the equipment for
safe storage.
When holding the ultrasound gel bottle, please do not touch the
surface of the probe with the tip of the bottle. It will cause severe
damage if sharp or hard stuff hits the surface of the transducer head.
Warranty service wont apply to these types of transducer damages.

4.1.2

Peruse check of the Probe


In daily use and cleaning, the probe is exposed to potentially dangerous environments.
Therefore, regular checks are necessary. Please pay close attention to the following
damages:
Cracks or scratches on the probe handle
Cracks or scratches on the protruding parts on both sides of the probe
Scratches or gouges on the surface of the transducer head of the probe
Swell or deformation on the surface of the transducer head of the probe
Cracks or any other damages on the probe connector
Bending of pins in the probe connector
Loosened part or other damages on the probe cable

!
Warning

Do not use probes with broken transducer head or broken probe sleeve
to avoid electrical shock.

21

Chapter 4 Use and Maintenance of Probes

4.1.3

Connect Probe

!
Warning

Before mounting the probe, make sure that there are no abnormalities
with the probe, cable and connector (such as cracks, loosenings).
There might be electrical shock hazard if using probes with
abnormalities.

1. Mount probe
1 Put the equipment in shut-down or freeze state.
2 Turn the ZIF Housing locking knob 90 anti-clockwise to open up.
3 Plug the ZIF Housing, perpendicular to the front panel, into the probe
connector, with the probe cable pointing upward.
4 Turn the ZIF Housing locking knob clockwise to lock it up on the probe
connector.
5 Check if the probe connector is locked up.
2. Detach probe
1 Put the equipment in shut-down or freeze state
2 Turn the ZIF Housing locking knob 90 anti-clockwise to open it
3 Pull ZIF Housing out
Mounting and detaching of ZIF Housing are shown as below:

Figure 4.1.3-1 Mount probes


The operator must set the system to freeze state with the Freeze
22

!
Warning

Chapter 4 Use and Maintenance of Probes

button before mounting or detaching probes. Otherwise, damage to


probes might occur. After mounting, do not plug in or pull out probes
at random to avoid poor connection between the ZIF Housing and the
probe connector.

4.1.4

Protection and Placement of Probe Cable


The probe cable is long. To prevent the probe cable from being damaged and to keep the
operation environment clean, the probe cable must first go through the probe hanger
underneath the control panel before being hung around the cable rack standing on the
equipment case.
The probe is put in the probe holder. On this equipment, there are three probe holders of
different shape and depth to accommodate different probes.

4.1.5

Select Probe

!
Warning

1. When installing or detaching probe from the probe connector, the


operator must set the system in freeze or shutdown state. When the
system is in scanning state, it must be set in freeze state by pressing
Freezebefore switching probe.
2. Do not install or detach probes in the process of loading probe
parameters through Probe1or Probe2, so that the probe or the
system wont be subject to damage.

1. Set probe parameters: Press Preset to enter Preset interface, then click
Probes to set probe parameters in that interface.
2. Select probe: PressFunc, when the button indicator lamp is on, press1to open
the interface shown as below, then chose the probe connected to connector 1.

Figure 4.1.5-1 Select probe

23

Chapter 4 Use and Maintenance of Probes

4.1.6

Pre-cautions for the Use of Probe


1. The biopsy guide line shown on the image screen is for reference only. When
performing biopsy examination, please make sure of the actual puncturing position
of the needle.
2. The probe may get damaged if it drops or hits on hard objects during operation.
Please handle the probe with care.
3. Make sure to mount and detach probes in the equipment shut-down or freeze
state.
4. The probe ZIF Housing is not water-proof. Please do not apply water on it nor dip it
in water to avoid damages.
5. Pay special attention to the protection of the transducer head. Stop using the probe
once damage to the transducer head or the probe cable cover is found. Otherwise,
electrical shock hazard may happen.
6. Do not turn on/off the equipment when the probe is being mounted or detached.
Otherwise, it will cause malfunction or damage to the probe.
7. Do not touch the exposed pins in the probe connector. Otherwise, static discharge
may cause equipment damage.
8. There are two probe connectors on the equipment. When switching probes, please
first pull off the unselected probe or set it to freeze state before switching.
9. Please follow the procedures listed in 4.5 Cleaning and Sterilization of Probes to
perform cleaning, sterilization and germ-killing of probes.
10. Do not put probes that havent gone through pressurized or depressurized
germ-killing treatment in the following environment:
Places where room temperature is above 40
Places filled with pressurized germ-killing gas
Places filled with depressurized germ-killing gas
Other places that havent gone through germ-killing treatment

4.2 Note on Endocavitary Probe in Gynecology Measurement

!
Warning

4.2.1

When the probe works in a sterile area or is used in intracavital


examinations, a SFDA (State Food and Drug Administration)
approved nonrecurring germ-free transducer shield must be used.

Vaginal Examination
< Note >
When performing vaginal examination with endocavitary probes, a germless condom
must be put around the transducer head. The probe may be put into the vagina by
either the examiner or the examinee to examine the inside of the pelvic cavity. Filling of
bladder is not required with this method. Also, because the probe is close to the uterus
and ovary, this method results in high image resolution and therefore accurate

24

Chapter 4 Use and Maintenance of Probes

examination. However, this method does not apply to bleeders, who are having
intermenstrual flow, nor does this method apply to patients with infectious diseases
such as vaginitis, venial disease or other cervix diseases, vaginopathy, or vulvopathy
to prevent kickbacks such as infection, cross-infection or bleeding.
< Pre-check Preparation >
The patient doesnt need to fill her bladder. Or, the examiner may first perform TAS
examination when the patients bladder is filled at a proper level and then ask the
patient to empty her bladder.
Put ultrasound gel on the endocavitary transducer and then wrap it with a germless
condom.
< Examination Method >
The patient takes examina nt position, that is, to bend her knee and hip by 90 each, to
fully expose her perineum, with her body relaxed. Put the endocavitary probe into the
vagina by 5-10cm to cling to the neck of uterus or vault. According to the place of the
uterus, move and rotate the probe inside the vagina till the endometrium is shown
clearly.

4.2.2

Rectal Examination
< Note >
It is not appropriate to perform vaginal examinations on unmarried women, aged
women with atrophied vagina or women not fit for vaginal examinations. In addition, if
abdominal examinations dont give clear images, rectal examination may be
performed to obtain the images of uterus and endomentrium.
< Pre-check Preparation >
No filling of bladder is required but defecation or enteroclysis is needed to prevent
scybalum from leading to fake images.
Put ultrasound gel on the surface of the endocavitary probe first, wrap it with a
germless condom and again put gel around the condom.
< Examination Method >
The patient takes the left lateral position or bladder examinant position. Slowly put the
endocavitary probe into the anal orifice. Move and rotate the probe till the uterus and
endometrium are shown clearly.

4.3 Storage of Probe


(1)

Storage during transportation


Make sure the probes are clean and sterilized before being put into probe boxes.
This helps prevent cross-contamination from probe boxes. Make sure to wrap the

25

Chapter 4 Use and Maintenance of Probes

transducer head and the ZIF Housing in plastic bags with air cushions or in
special spongy cushions. Packaged probes must be put in probe boxes during
transportation.
(2)

In-vitro probe
Clean and sterilize the transducer before storage.
Hang the probe cable around the hanger after use.

(3)

Endocavitary probe
Clean and sterilize the transducer before storage.
Hang the transducer cable around the hanger after use.
Put the endocavitary transducer separately from other devices to prevent
damages.
Make sure the transducer is completely dry before storage.
Do not put the transducer in an environment where temperature is
overly high or low. The environment temperature should be maintained
at -545.
Avoid direct sunshine.

26

Chapter 4 Use and Maintenance of Probes

4.4 Ultrasound Coupling Gel


Please use the special medical ultrasound coupling gel (or glycol, glycerin, or water
based coupling jelly) for complete transmission of ultrasound signals. Coulpings
containing mineral oil or oil based gel or other unverified substances are forbidden.

!
Notice

Its forbidden to use coupling gel that contains the following


substances or chemical preparations:
Methanol, ethanol, isopropanol or other alcohol,
Acetone,
denatured ethylene alcohol,
mineral oil,
iodine, iodine tincture;
lanoline, aloin and olive oil;
methyl phenol, ethyl phenol;
dimethyl silscone;
methyl p-hydroxybenzoate;
methyl benzoate;
ethyl benzoat;
propanetriol;
any detergent or coupling gel containing fragrance.

4.5 Cleaning and sterilization of probe


4.5.1

Cleaning and sterilization of probe


1. Control of source of infection is important to healthcare. The transducer must be
cleaned and sterilized after each examination to avoid contamination. The level of
transducer sterilization depends on the body parts and organs examined.
2. After use, wipe the gel off with soft paper tissue or cloth. Otherwise, the transducer
may discolor or deteriorate.
3. Do not wipe the transducer with hard paper, cloth or crude paper to prevent the
acoustic lens from being damaged, or prevent electrical shock.
4. Put the transducer in the transducer box if it is not used. Do not hit or drop it.
Its forbidden to sterilize the transducer in the following ways in order
to prevent severe damages:
Autolave
Ultraviolet rays
Gamma rays
Gas, steam or heat

4.5.2

Sterilization
The following ways of sterilization are suitable for transducers supplied by the
27

Chapter 4 Use and Maintenance of Probes

manufacturer. Also, damage or malfunction of transducers due to other ways or


sterilization is not covered in the service agreement.
It is recommended to dip or wipe transducers in the following ways, which have all been
tested:
High intensity sterilization
Cidex PlusTM
Wavicide-01
Omnicide

!
Notice

28

Low intensity sterilization


Sani-Cloth
T-spray

For endocavitary transducer, please choose high-intensity


sterilization.
General sterilization does not apply to endocavitary transducers.

Chapter 4 Use and Maintenance of Probes

!
Warning

4.5.3

Please strictly follow the instruction manuals to use the above sterile
liquid. Cidex PlusTM and CidexTM are frequently used at hospitals.
Please remember that idexTM will cause harm to transducers.
Do not try to sterilize the transducer with any sterile liquids other than
the above listed ones!
The following chemical preparations and drugs frequently used in
hospitals will harm the transducer:
Phenol and related chemicals,
benzethonium chloride;
phisohex;
benzoyl peroxide;
hydrogen peroxide;
Methanol, ethanol, isopropanol or other alcohols;
The manufacturer doesnt guarantee repair and service of transducer
damages from the use of above chemicals.

General cleaning process (non-derogatory)


General cleaning of transducers concerns all transducers. All transducers are prohibited
from contacting mucous tissues, blood or tissues of low immunity and low resistance. Do
not use the above hi-intensity sterilization in the general cleaning process.
Important reminder!
Please follow the below methods and procedures when cleaning the transducer and
its cable:
1. Completely wipe off the gel on the transducer surface after each use.
2. Wipe clean the transducer and cable with dry or slightly wet sandy cloth (or
other soft cotton cloth).
3. Use sterile liquid containing the following ingredients to wipe the transducer
surface:
Metrizyme;
Klenzyme.
4. Use T-spray germicide to clean the cable. Use low-intensity sterilization to clean
the in-vitro transducers. Never use isopropanol to clean the transducer cable
and the lock on the ZIF Housing.
5. Use soaked sandy cloth or other soft cotton cloth to get rid of stains on
transducers. Its forbidden to use cleaning detergent or isopropanol.

4.5.4

Cleaning and sterilization of endocavitary transducer


The endocavitary transducer must be cleaned and sterilized in the following procedures
before and after examination of patients:
1. Pull the transducer off the ultrasound main system.
29

Chapter 4 Use and Maintenance of Probes

2.
3.

4.
5.

Clean the probe and cable with soap water. Do not soak or wet the transducer
ZIF Housing.
Use the above high-intensity sterilization to sterilize the endocavitary transducer
Please protect the transducer against strong solutions such as acetone, Freon,
or other industrial detergents.
Do not soak the transducer.
Do not wet or soak the transducer ZIF Housing.
Wash off the sterile liquid with germ-free water
Examine carefully for any leftover human tissue or stains on the transducer and
cable. If discovered, the whole cleaning and sterilization process must be
performed over again.

4.6 Note on Probe Protection Level


1.
2.

30

The probe protection level meets the requirements in IPX7 (En 60529)
Probe connector (ZIF Housing) should not be dipped into liquid. Only the
transducer head and part of the probe cable can be dipped into liquid, with a depth
of 0.15-1cm, shown in the below Figure.

Chapter 5 Parts and Functions

Chapter 5 Parts and Functions


5.1 Main Structure

Figure 5.1-1 Front View of the Equipment

Figure 5.1-2 Back View of the Equipment

31

Chapter 5 Parts and Functions

The overall view of the equipment is shown as Figure 5.1-1, Figure 5.1-2. Its mainly
composed of the main system, monitor, probe connected, etc.

5.2 Peripheral Devices


5.2.1

Layout of the peripheral panel

Figure 5.2.1-1 Layout of Peripheral Panel


The layout of the peripheral panel is as shown in Figure 5.2.1-1:
(1) USB port (USB1, USB2): Connect to devices that abide by the USB protocol
(2) VIDEO OUT: Connect to video printers and ultrasound work stations.
(3) LAN: Connect to network or other related devices from the DICOM protocol

32

Chapter 5 Parts and Functions

5.3 Control Panel


(2)
(1)

(0)
(12) (13) (14)

Probe
B

A
Esc

(3)

Tab

(4)

Func

1 !

Shift

(6)

New Pat

4 $

5 %

6 ^

7 &

8 *

(5)

3 #

S
z

D
X

G
V

Pat Data

Report

(7)

(8)

, <

. >

= +
] }

[ {

/ ?

BS
\ |

Enter
Shift

Del
Ins
Preset
Calc

Clear Text Clear All

Text

; :

(9)
2

0 )

K
M

Space

(15)

9(

(10)
5

TGC

(11)
6

(24)

(17)

(35)

Select

(16)

(18)
B/M

(36)

U/D

Focus

(19)

Dist

B/B

Cine
Store

(21)

(26)

Frequency

Zoom
BodyMark

(37)

(27)

Arrow

(34)

Depth

(31)

Cine
Loop

(20)

(25)

Area

Set
Image
Store

Next

(28)

(33)
Value

(32)

(30)

(22)

Gain

(23)

(38)
Print

(29)
Freeze

Figure 5.3-1 Control Panel


(0) Power indicator light: When the equipment is on work, the indicator light is on.
(1) Boot Switch: Open or close systenm.
(2) Probe: Press Func, When the button indicator lamp is on, press 1 to switch
to probe 1; Press Func, When the button indicator lamp is on, press 2 to
switch to probe 2.
(3) Alpha-numeric Keyboard

33

Chapter 5 Parts and Functions

New Patient,Pat Data,Character,Character Clear,Clear All,Preset,


each has its own function. Other buttons have the same functions as those buttons on
the standard keyboard.
(4) Func combination key
Press Func, When the button indicator lamp is on, press other key to call different
function.
Func+ 1:Switch to probe 1;
Func+ 2: Switch to probe 1;.
Func+ 4: Switch to user define 1 application;
Func+ 5: Switch to user define 2 application;
Func+ 6: Switch to user define 3 application;
Func+ 7: Switch to user define 4 application;
Func+ 8: Switch to Abdomen application;
Func+ 9: Switch to Gynecologic Obstetric;
Func+ 0: Switch to Obstetric Cardiac;
Func+ -: Switch to Cardiac Small Part;
Func+ =: Switch to Small Part Small Part;
Func+ L:On unfreeze B mode, Biopsy guide line displays on/off;
(5) ShitKey: Press Shit, When the button indicator lamp is on the function of shif
is attived.
New Patientbutton

(7)

Pat Databutton

(8)

Reportbutton

: To activate Measurement Report function.

(9)

Textbutton

: To activate the Text function.

(10) Clear Textbutton


(11) Clear Allbutton
and

: To activate the Patient Data Management function.

: To activate the Clear Text function.


: To clear all measurement tracks, results and all Text

arrow marks.

(12) Ins button

34

: To activate the New Patient function.

(6)

: Use Func+ = combination key to Switch

to urology

Chapter 5 Parts and Functions

application, and freeze image on B Mode or B/B mode, then press Ins button to
activate Urology Measurement.
: To activate the System Preset function.

(13) Presetbutton
(14) Calc button

: To activate Gynecology Measurement, Cardiac

Measurement functions according to the current application mode or preset


operation status.
Use Func+ 9 combination key to Switch to Gynecologic application, and
freeze image on B Mode or B/B mode, then press Calc to activate
Gynecology Measurement;
Use Func+ 0 combination key to Switch to Obstetric application, and freeze
image on B Mode or B/B mode, then press Calcto activate Obstetric
Measurement;
Use Func+ - combination key to Switch to Cardiology application, and
freeze image on B Mode or B/B mode, then press Calc to activate
Cardiology Measurement;

: In the B/B mode, press this button to unfreeze left-B image

(15) Select button

or right-B image; In the B/B mode, press this button to switch to B/M mode or M
mode.

(16) B/Mbutton

: Press this button to switch to the B/M mode.

(17) U/Dbutton

: Press this button to switch image direction Up/Down.

: Press this button to switch to the B/B mode.

(18) B/Bbutton

(19) Bbutton

: Press this button to switch to the B /Bmode.

(20) Cine Loopbutton

: In the freeze state, press this button to activate CINE

Loop. Presses it again to pause CINE Loop.


35

Chapter 5 Parts and Functions

: In freeze state of B mode, press this button to save

(21) Cine Storebutton

the current scanning result as video.

(22) Image Storebutton

: In freeze state, press this button to save the current

screen display as image.

(23) Printbutton
: To activate the digital video printer function after the
printer is connected and output the current screen image to the printer.
(24) Menu button 1~6: Push menu button 1~6 to activate the corresponding screen
reminder menu

(25) Distbutton

(26) Areabutton

: To activate distance related measurement functions.

: To activate area related measurement functions.

(27) Body Markbutton BodyMark : To activate the Body Mark function, then turn
Value knob to change the probe mark. direction
(28) Next button : It serves as Cancel. Press Next to cancel the current
measurement tracks and values. Press Nextcontinuously to cancel the previous
measurement tracks and values one by one. On other non-image-operation-screens,
this button serves as the right button of the mouse.

(29) Setbutton: It serves as Confirm. It is used to confirm the starting point, the
ending point in measurement and the overall measurement track, and to confirm
each menu button. On other non-image-operation-screens, this button serves as the
left button of the mouse.

36

Chapter 5 Parts and Functions

(30) Valueknob

: In some functions, this knob is used to change the

value such as depth, frequency, focus place, brightness, contrast, as well as arrow
direction and probe direction in body marks.

(31) Gainknob

: In the scanning mode, turn this knob to change the total

gain.

: To activate the arrow mark function, then turn Valueknob


(32) Arrowbutton
to change the arrow direction.

(33) Zoom
: In unfreeze B mode, press this button to activate the Zoom
function and turn Valueknob to change the zoom multiplying factor.

(34) Focusbutton
: In unfreeze state, Press this button, when the indicate lamp
is on, turn Valueknob to change the focus place.

(35) Frequencybutton
: In unfreeze state, Press this button, when the indicate
lamp is on, turn Valueknob to change the working frequency of the probe.

(36) DEPTHbutton
: In unfreeze state, Press this button, when the indicate
lamp is on, turn Valueknob to change the probe scanning depth.

(37) Freezebutton

: Switch between image freeze and scan.

37

Chapter 6 Instruction

Chapter 6 Instruction
6.1 Move the Equipment
6.1.1 Pre-move Preparation
Make sure to check the followings before moving the equipment
1 Make sure the equipment is shut down.
2 Detach connecting cables of all peripheral devices
3 Detach all peripheral devices that are connected but not fixed. Move them
separately from the main system.
4 Shut down the boot switch, pull out the power plug, and roll the power cable
around the hanger on the back of the equipment.
5 Put all connected probes in the probe holder. Put probe cables in the hanger.
Put all unconnected probes in probe cases and move them separately.
6 Move all barriers on the way of the moving in advance.

6.1.2 Procedures for Moving the Equipment


1Hold the handle on the equipment and move it.
2After moving, make sure the equipment is landed on a flat floor .

6.1.3 Precautions for Moving the Equipment


1Make sure to lock the control panel before moving.
2Make sure to hold the rear handle of the machine when moving.
3In the moving process, do not collide the machine with other objects or shake the
machine.
4Do not tilt the machine by over 10.

6.2 Adjustment of Monitor


Please use theBrightnessandContrastknobs to chang the brightness and contrast of
the Monitor.

38

Chapter 6 Instruction

Figure 6.2-1 Monitor


Bright : Turn Brightness knob to change brightness.
Contrast: Turn Contrast knob to change contrast.

6.3 Installation of Video Printer


1 Plug the power cable of the printer into the power output outlet on the power case
of the equipment.
2 Connect the video input cable of the printer to Video Out on the Peripheral
Connecting Panel on the left side of the main system.Terminal position shown as
Figure 6.3-1.

Figure6.3-1 Peripheral Device Connecting Panel


39

Chapter 6 Instruction

6.4 Starting the Equipment


6.4.1

Connecting to Power
Refer to 1.4 Connecting to General Power.

6.4.2

Starting
Refer to 1.5.8 Starting/ Shutting the Equipment.

6.5 Adjusting Equipment and Setting Parameters

Refer to 6.2.2 Adjusting Monitor for adjusting brightness and contrast of the monitor.
Refer to 8.2 General-(1) for setting hospital name.
Refer to 8.2 general-(2)~(4) for setting time and date.
Refer to 8.2 General-(5) for setting screen language.
Refer to 8.1 probes for setting probes.
Refer to 4.1.5 Probe Select for probe switch.
Refer to 7.2 Basic Display Mode for applying the display mode.

6.6 End of Use


Refer to 1.6.8 Starting/Shutting Equipment to shut down the machine.
Refer to 4.5 Cleaning and Sterilization of Probe to clean the probe.
After use, wipe the coupling gel off the probe with soft paper tissue or
cloth. Otherwise, the transducer may discolor or deteriorate.
Do not wipe the transducer with hard paper, cloth or crude paper to
prevent the acoustic lens from being eroded, or prevent electrical
shock.

40

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

Chapter 7 Operation Guide


7.1 Summary
Stipulations have been made to simplify the description of the operation procedures.
Please follow Stipulations in the beginning of this manual.

7.2 Basic Display Mode


7.2.1

Entering and Switch of Basic Mode


Press
Dual/Single
to enter B/B
mode

Press L/R to
change left and
right in B mode

Press B to
enter B mode
Press
Dual/Single to
enter B/B mode

Active

Active

Press
Dual/Single to
enter B mode

Press
L/R

Freez
e

Active

Press
L/R

Active

Freeze

Figure 7.2.1-1 Enabling and Switch of Mode

7.2.2

Main Display Screen in B Mode

41

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

Figure 7.2.2-1 Main Display Screen in B Mode

Figure 7.2.2-2 Main Display Screen in B Mode


42

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

7.2.3

Main Display Screen in B/B Mode

Figure 7.2.3-1 Main Display Screen in B/B Mode

7.2.4

Main Display screen in 4B Mode

Figure 7.2.4-1 Main Display Screen in B/M Mode


43

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

7.2.5

Main Display screen in B/M Mode

Figure 7.2.5-1 Main Display Screen in B/M Mode

7.2.6

Main Display screen in M Mode

Figure 7.2.6-1 Main Display Screen in M Mode


44

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

7.3 Function Menu Buttons for Image Adjustment


Most of the menu displayed in B Mode, B/B Mode B/M Mode and M Mode are
the same, but have differences as show bellow.
1. 90rotation is adjustable only in B mode and B/B mode
2. Gray scale histogram is adjustable only in B mode
3. M Speed is adjustable only in B/M mode and M mode
4. Up-down reverse and left-right reverse is adjustable only in B mode and B/B
mode.

we should operate the function menu, before which there is,such


asContrast100, brightness0and Gamma12,like shown as
below.
1. Push the corresponding menu button.
2. then turn theValueknob to change its value.

7.3.1

B Mode Menu in Real Time State

Switch of Menu
Page 1:
1 Display Menu 2 Image Menu 1
Page II-:

3 Image Menu 2

5 Orientation No
Push menu button 6

Push menu button 1

2 Up/Down Up 3 90 deg. Rotation No 4 Histogram Off 5 Guide Line

6 Return

Page 1:
1 Display Menu 2 Image Menu 1 3 Image Menu 2
5 Orientation No
Page II-:
Push menu button 2

Push menu button 6

1 Dynamic Range120 2 Focuses 1 3 Line Average High 4 Frame Average3

6 Return

Page 1:
1 Display Menu 2 Image Menu 1 3 Image Menu 2
5 Orientation No
Page II-
Push menu button 3

1 B/W Invert Off 2 Enhance3

3Contrast 100

4Brightness0

Push menu button 6

5Gamma12 6 Return

45

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

Interpretation of Menu
Page 1:
1 Display Menu 2 Image Menu 1 3 Image Menu 2
5 Orientation No
1 Display Parameter
Push menu button 1, and enter menu page II-1
2 Image Parameter 1
Push menu button 2, and enter menu page II-2
3 Image Parameter 2
Push menu button 3, and enter menu page II-3
5 Orientation Left Right
Push menu button 5 to reverse the image left and right. Adjustable only in B mode and
B/B mode.

Page -1:
2 Up/Down Up
3 90 deg. Rotation No 4 Histogram Off
6 Return
2 Up/Down
Push function menu button 2 to reverse the image up and down.
3 90Rotation
Push menu button 3 to rotate image by 90.
4 Histogram
Push menu button 4 to show gray scale histogram. Transverse axis shows gray scale
of pixels (0~255, which represents a change from the darkest (black) to the brightest
(white). Vertical axis shows the amount of Brightness scattered on each gray scale
from 0 to 255. Choices are Histogram Off, Histogram On. Histogram is
adjustable only in B mode.
Pels

Gray Scale 0

Gray Scale255

Figure 7.3.1-1 Histogram


5 Biopsy Guide Line
Push menu button 5 to adjust the angle of the Biopsy Guide Line. Press downwards to
decrease the angle; Press upwards to increase the angle. The angle value is decided
by preset8.11.2 Set Biopsy Guide Line. Plese refer to7.11 Guide about the
operation. Adjustable only in B mode and B/B mode.
6 Return
Push menu button 6 to return to page 1 of menu.
46

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

PageII-2:
1 Dynamic Range120

2 Focuses 2

3 Line Average High 4 Frame Average3

6 Return

1 Dynamic Range
Dynamic range, measured in db, refers to the ratio of the strongest and the weakest
signal that the receiving amplifier could receive and process. Push menu button 1 to
change dynamic range.
2 Focuses
Focuses refers to size of focus region.
Push function menu button 2 to change Focuses. Up push indicates increase, down
push indicates decrease. Choices are Focuses 1, Focuses 2, and Focuses 3.
3 Line Average
The higher the line average, the more refined is the image, and the lower the image
noise. However, if the line average is too high, the edge of the image will blur.
Push menu button 3 to change line average.
4 Frame Average
Factors such as limited space resolution of ultrasound beams and noise lead to freckle
noise in ultrasound image. This is an inherent problem with ultrasound imaging system.
Random light spots are high frequency noises, which could be eliminated by low-pass
filtering. Low-pass filtering can be conducted in airspace or frequency domain. In view
of requirements like real time processing and least memory volume in ultrasound
image processing, recursive filtering is frequently used. The so-called frame average
or frame correlation, is a simple recursive filtering, or an IIR-structured low-pass filter.
Appropriate increase of frame average could abate noise and lead to more smooth
images.
Push menu button 4 to change frame average.
6 Return
Push menu button 6 to return to menu page 1.
Page-:
1 B/W Invert Off 2 Enhance 0 3Contrast 0 4Brightness 0 5Gamma10 6 Return

1 B/W Invert
Push menu button 2 to invert black and white, which is changing image pixels. Let
image change from black to white and from white to black.
2 Enhance
Edge enhancement can enhance the image edge and weaken other parts of the image.
As the result of edge enhancement, the image edge becomes clearer while the whole
image become coarser.
Push menu button 2 to change Edge enhancement. Pushing up is to increase edge
enhancement. Pushing down is to decrease edge enhancement.
3 Contrast
Contrast refers to the contrast output of the image pixels. The higher the contrast, the
clearer is the image, and the more patient information.
<Operation Method>
47

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

1.Push menu button 3 to activate contrast adjustment.


2.Turn theValueknob to change contrast.
4 Brightness
Brightness refers to the lumen output of the image pixels. The higher the brightness,
the brighter is the image; The lower the brigtness, the darker the image.
<Operation Method>
1.Push menu button 4 to activate brightness adjustment.
2.TurnValueknob to change gray scale.
5 Gamma
Gamma Correction of gray scale is to correct the nonlinearity of light intensity or the
nonlinearity between the gray scale grade and the real recorded black scale.
<Operation Method>
1.Push menu button 5 to activate gamma correction.
2.Turn theValueknob to change the gamma value.
6 Return
Push menu button 6 to return to menu page 1.

7.3.2

B/B Mode Menu in Real Time State

Switch of Menu
Page :
1 Display Menu
Page -:

2 Image Menu 1

3 Image Menu 2

5 Orientation Left

Push menu button 6

Push menu button 1

1 M-Speed Middle

6 Return

Page :
1 Display Menu 2 Image Menu 1
3 Image Menu 2
5 Orientation Left
Page -:

Push menu button 6

Push menu button 2

1 Dynamic Range120 2 Focuses 2

3 Line Average High 4 Frame Average3

6Return

Page :
1 Display Menu 2 Image Menu 1 3 Image Menu 2
5 Orientation Left
Page -:
1 B/W Invert Off

48

Push menu button 3

2Enhance 0

3Contrast 0

4Brightness 0

Push menu button 6

5Gamma10

6Return

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

Interpretation of Menu
Please refer to 7.3.1 B Mode Menu in Real Time State.

7.3.3

4B Mode Menu in Real Time State

Switch of Menu
Page :
1 Display Menu
Page -:

2 Image Menu 1

3 Image Menu 2

5 Orientation Left
Push menu button 6

Push menu button 1

1 M-Speed Middle

6 Return

Page :
1 Display Menu 2 Image Menu 1
3 Image Menu 2
5 Orientation Left
Page -:

Push menu button 6

Push menu button 2

1 Dynamic Range120 2 Focuses 2

3 Line Average High 4 Frame Average3

6 Return

Page :
1Display Menu 2 Image Menu 1 3 Image Menu 2
5 Orientation Left
Page -:
1 B/W Invert Off

Push menu button 3

2Enhance 0

3Contrast 0

4Brightness 0

Push menu button 6

5Gamma10

6 Return

Interpretation of Menu
Please refer to 7.3.1 B Mode Menu in Real Time State.

7.3.4

B/M Mode and M Mode Menu in Real Time State


In real time state, function menu of B/M mode is the same as B mode
basically. Only difference is that page - of B/M mode havent the
function of 4 Histogram Off and 3 90 deg. Rotation,but have the
function of 1 M-Speed.
The difference of M mode menu and B/M mode menu is that page M mode menu havent the function of 5 Orientation.

49

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

Switch of Menu
Page :
1 Display Menu 2 Image Menu 1
Page -:

3 Image Menu 2

5 Orientation Left
Push menu button 6

Push menu button 1

1 M-Speed Middle

6 Return

Page :
1 Display Menu 2 Image Menu 1
3 Image Menu 2
5 Orientation Left
Page -:

Push menu button 6

Push menu button 2

1 Dynamic Range120 2 Focuses 2

3 Line Average High 4 Frame Average3

6 Return

Page :
1 Display Menu 2 Image Menu 1 3 Image Menu 2
5 Orientation Left
Page -:
1 B/W Invert Off

Push menu button 3

2 Enhance 0

3Contrast 0

4Brightness 0

Push menu button 6

5Gamma10

6 Return

Interpretation of Menu
Please refer to 7.3.1 B Mode Menu in Real Time State. In addition, B/M mode menu
1., which means the following:
includes 1 M-Speed Middle on page -
1 M Speed
Push button 1 to change the speed in M mode. Adjustable only in M mode and B/M
mode.

7.3.5
1 Play

50

B Mode Menu in Freeze State


2 Speed of Play 1/2
3 Edit Clear
4 Frame Start
5 Frame End
6 Cine Store
1 Play
Freeze image, then push menu button 1 to automatically play cine in the cache. Push
menu button 1 again to pause.
2 Speed of Play
Push menu button 2 to change Speed of Play. Push up to increase. Push down to
decrease.
3 Edit Clear
Menu 3 shows only when the Frame Start mark and the Frame End mark are there.
Push menu botton 3 to clear the Frame Start mark and the the Frame End Mark.
4 Frame Start, 5Frame End

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

By default, press Cine Storeto store the complete cine video in the cache. Push
button 4 Frame Start and button 5 Frame End to intercept part of the cine video if
only part of the video is needed.
<Operation Method>
1.Roll the trackball to move the cursor to the Frame Start position and ush menu
button 4 to set Frame Start ( In this case, Frame End can only be intercepted
between Frame Start and the Frame End of video) .
2.Roll the trackball, move the cursor to the Frame End position and push menu
button 5 to set Frame End.
<Notice>
After one section of cine video is intercepted, auto play, manual paly or cine store are
performed on this session only. Push menu button 3 Edit Clear to clear Frame Start
and Frame End.
6 Image Store
After freezing images, move the trackball or automatic play to check each frame of the
cine video. Find the pre-saved frame of image, push button 6 to store it into the
database. Images can be saved by pressing Image Store. Press Pat Data to
enter Patient Management to check and mange saved images.

7.3.6

Menu Button in B/B, B/M and M mode in Freeze State


Menu in freeze state:
1 Play
Menu reads 1 Play. Please refer to 7.3.3 B Mode menu in freeze state.

7.4 Frequency, depth and electronic focus

Reminder

7.4.1

The three buttons of Frequency,Depthand Focuscan be


activated in freeze state only. Their values can be changed through
turning theValueknob.

Frequency
Frequency refers to the ultrasound working frequency. The system has set the transmitting
frequency for each probe according to the probe parameters. In real time state, push up
and down the Frequencybutton to change the frequency. Push up to increase beam
frequency and push down to decrease. At the top right corner of the Image, current
probe frequency is shown.

Figure 7.4.1-1 Frequency

51

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

7.4.2

Depth
Depth refers to probe scanning depth. The system has set scanning depth ranges
according to parameters of each probe. In real time state, push up and down Depth
to change depth value. Push up to increase depth. The indicator on the depth curve on
the right side of the image area will increase accordingly. Push down to decrease depth.
The indicator on the depth curve on the right side of the image area will decrease
accordingly. The current depth is shown in the top right corner of the image area.

Figure 7.4.2-1 Depth

7.4.3

Focus
Electronic focus can enhance the signal intensity at the focus to get more accurate
image information.
In real time state, push Focus to change the working frequency. Push up to move
the focus up. Push down to move the focus down.

Decrease

Depth scale curve

Turn Value

Press Depth

Value

Increase

Figure 7.4.3-1 Focus

7.5 Cine Store and Cine Search


7.5.1

Image Store
Image Store

7.5.2

In real time state, Image Store is not activated, that is, pressing
Image Store is not resulting in any response.
In freeze state, press Image Store and the current screen
image will be stored.

CINE Loop
In real time state,CINE Loopis not activated, that is, pressingCINE Loop

52

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

is not resulting in any response.


In freeze state, press CINE Loopthen cine loop will play manually.

7.5.3

CINE Store
CINE Storecan only been activated in freeze state in B mode. Press CINE
Storeand the current cine video will be intercepted. If no interception has been
selected, by default, the complete cine video in the cache will be stored.

7.5.4

Image Storage Operation


(1)

(2)

(3)
(4)
(5)

7.5.5

Real time scan: Press Freezeto turn off the light and enter real time scanning
state. The transducer now emits ultrasound beams. The system filters the echo
captured by the receiver, analyzes them and then shows the real time pathological
information in the form of ultrasonic image. At a proper beam frequency (usually,
image looks better when at the central frequency of the probe), adjust parameters
such as gain, depth, focal point, gray scale, dynamic range and edge
enhancement to improve image quality.
Freeze: Press Freezeto turn on its light to enter freeze state. Now the probe
stops emitting and receiving ultrasound beams. The system will temporarily store
recently scanned videos. Press Presetto enter system preset to set the
maximum number of cine video frames.
Automatic cine loop:Push button 1 to play
Manual cine loop: After freezing, move the trackball to position each frame of cine
images.
Image store: Refer to 7.5.1 Image Store. Press Patient Datato enter
Patient Data to check stored images.

Operation of Cine Store

Figure 7.5.5-1 Operation of Cine Store


Note:

Only in B mode can cine video be stored.


(1) Real time scan: PressFreeze to turn off the light and enter real time scanning
state. The probe now emits ultrasound beams. The system filters the echo
captured by the receiver, analyzes them and then shows real time pathological
information in the form of ultrasonic image. At proper beam frequency(usually,
image looks better when at the central frequency of the probe), adjust parameters
53

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

(2)

(3)
(4)
(5)

54

such as gain, depth, focal point, gray scale, dynamic range and edge
enhancement to improve image quality.
Freeze: Press Freezeto turn on its light to enter freeze state. Now the probe
stops emitting ultrasound beams. The system will temporarily store the recently
scanned cine videos. Please press Presetto enter system preset to set the
maximum number of cine video frames.
Intercept a section of cine video: refer to 7.3.5 Menu button in B mode.
Intercept complete cine video by default: If save without intercepting a section, the
complete cine video temporarily stored in cache will be stored.
Cine storage: Refer to 7.5.3 CINE Store. Please press Patient Data
to enter Patient Data to check stored cine video.
,and the zoom image will be
Press Zoom,the cursor will change into
showed at the same time.Move the cursor to change the zoom region.Turn
anti-clockwise to decrease zoom. Turn clockwise to increase zoom.

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

7.6 PAN Zoom


Zoom will be activated only in real time scan.
Press Zoom button the first time to open the function of Zoom,
and adjusting the Zoom by turn Value knob. Press Zoom
button for the second time, quit theZoom

Zoom

Press Zoom,the cursor will change into


,and the zoom image will be showed at the
same time.

Move the cursor to change the zoom region.

Trace ball

Decrease
Increase

Turn Valueanti-clockwise to decrease zoom


Turn Valueclockwise to increase zoom.

Value

Zoom

PressZoomagain and quit the function.

7.7 Gain Adjustment


7.7.1

Adjustment of Total Gain

Note: Total Gain can be adjusted only in real


time scanning state.

55

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

Turn Gainto show the gain curve on the


right side of image area( shown on the right
side of the left figure).
Turn anti-clockwise to decrease the gain.
Turn clockwise to increase the gain.
Decrease the gain, then the gain curve
moves to the left, echo signals are weaken
and image brightness decreases. Increase
the gain, then the gain curve will moves to the
right, echo signals are enhanced and image
brightness increases.

7.7.2

TGCTime Gain Control


The system divides the image area into 8
bands from the near field to the far field.
Move the TCG lever to adjust the gain
value of the section this particular level
stands for. TGC is to control the amplifying
ratio of the receiving amplifier to
compensate the ultrasound attenuation
when going through the human body and
thus enhance echo signals and increase
image brightness.
Move the lever to the left to decrease the
gain value. The corresponding gain curve
will move to the left; Move the lever to the
right to increase the gain value. The
corresponding gain curve will move to the
right. Please set up continued display time
of the gain curve in Preset.

56

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

7.8 Guide

!
Notice

1. Probes supporting puncture needle guide must be used to display


needle guide line.
2. If zoom function is needed during biopsy, please set the location
and size of the zoomed region properly and better let the guide line
go through the center of the area to prevent it from disappearing from
the screen.
3. The biopsy guide line only shows the reference forwarding path of
the needle.
4. Please refer to the probe operation manual for mounting the biopsy
guide bracket and calibration.

Guide Var
Guide
30.0

Func

Guide line

L
Biospy guide line

Push 5 Guide Line downward to decrese the


guide angle.

Guide Var

Guide line

Press FucnandL,and the biopsy guide line


displays in the image area. The bottom left of the
screen shows Biopsy guide line while the right
upper corner shows Guide, which is the angle
between the biopsy guide line and the vertical
direction.

Guide
45.0

increase

Biospy guide line

Guide Var
Guide
15.0

decrease

Guide line

Push 5 Guide Line upward to increse the guide


angle. The angle value is the same as the preset
value. Refer to 8.11.2 Set Biopsy Guide Line for
details.

Biospy guide line

Func

PressLwhen Func is active and the guide


line disappears, together with the relevant notes.

57

Chapter 7 Operation Guide

7.9 Calibrating the needle-guided bracket


1Mount the needle-guide bracket on the corresponding probe
2Fix the needle
3Put the emitting side of the probe vertically on top of the water surface with slight
touch with water
4Adjust the needle angle to make the needle image parallel to the guide line
5The distance between the two lines is measurable and this is the deviation of the
needle from the guide line.

58

Chapter 8 System Preset

Chapter 8 System Preset


Press

!
Notice

to enter System Preset. Items that could be preset

include:Probes, General, Device, Network, Dicom, Storage,


Applications, Obstetric Tables, Fetal Parameter, Backup Data and
Misc.Tools. If an item is grayed, it indicates that this item is not
changeable.

Figure 8-1 System Preset


1
2
3
4
5

Probes: Please refer to 8.1 Probes.


General: Please refer to 8.2 General.
Device: Please refer to 8.3 Device.
Network: Please refer to 8.4 Network.
Storage: Please refer to 8.6 Storage.
59

Chapter 8 System Preset

6 DICOM: Please refer to 8.5 DICOM .


7 StoragePlease refer to 8.6 Storage
8 Application: Please refer to 8.7 Application Setting.
9 Obstetric Tables: Please refer to 8.8 Obstetric Tables.
10 Fetal Parameter: Please refer to 8.9 Fetal Parameter.
11 Backup Data: Please refer to 8.10 Backup Data.
12 Misc.Tools: Please refer to 8.11 Misc.Tools.
13 Menu button 6: Exit System Preset.

8.1 Probes

Reminder

1. On this interface, the operator can preset emitting frequency,


depth,
view angle and focus of each probe. When a probe is mounted, these
preset values will be loaded in the mean time.
2. When finishing preset, the operator must press OKor click
Applyto save the settings.

Click Probesand the interface for probe parameter setup pops up, as shown in Figure
8.1-1.

60

Chapter 8 System Preset

Figure 8.1-1 Probe setup


1 Probe name: Click [Probe Name] drop-down box and choices of probes that the
system supports pop up.
2 Apllication: After choosing the probe name, click [Application] to choose an
application mode, for an example:Obdomen, Gynecologic, Obstetric. when
switching to this probe, this application will be loaded.
3 Frequency: Click [Frequency] drop-down box and choices of probe emitting
frequency pop up.
4 Depth: Click [Depth Size] drop-down box and choices of detecting depth pop up.
5 View Angle: Click [View Angle] drop-down box and three choices of Wide,
Normal and Narrow pop up.
6 Focus: Click [Focus] drop-down box and eight choices of focal points F1~F8 pop
up.
7 Default: Select a probe in the [Probe Name] drop-down box. Then click
Default and the preset parameters of the probe were restored to the
equipment ex-works values. The click Registerto change in the below list.
8 Save: After setting up the parameters of a probe, click Register to save these
parameters.
9 Details of Probe and Parameters: Every probes emitting frequency, scan depth,
view angle and focus position are listed in tables.
10 OK: click OK, save the settings and exit the probe setup interface.
11 Cancel: clickCancel, exit the probe setup interface without saving
settings.
12 Apply: click Apply,save the settings without exiting the probe setup Interface.

8.2 General
1. On this interface, the operator could set hospital name, date, time,
interface language, maximum video frame and screen savers.
2. After setting, the operator must click OKor click applyor push
button 4 to save the settings.
Click Generaland the General interface pops up. Shown in Figure 8.2-1

61

Chapter 8 System Preset

Figure 8.2-1 General


1 Hospital name: press Set, click the [Hospital] edit box and the operator could
enter the hospital name with the letter keys and numeric keys on the keyboard.

Reminder

1. Push menu button 1 to open or close Chinese Input Methodology. No


display on non-Chinese interfaces.
2. Push menu button 2 to switch letter cases. No display on non-Chinese
interfaces.

2 Date: click the [Date] edit box

and the operator could enter

the current date .


3 Format of Date: Click the [Format] drop-down box, as shown in figure 8.2-2.
62

Chapter 8 System Preset

Figure 8.2-2 Format of Date


Formats supported are:
yy/mm/dd. For example, October 13, 2004 is expressed as 2004/10/13.
dd-mm-yy. For example, October 13, 2004 is expressed as 13-10-04.
mm.dd.yy. For example, October 13, 2004 is expressed as 10-13-04.
4 Time:
.

Press Set to select 11 in


increase hour. Click

to

to decrease hour.

Press Set to select 19 in


minute. Click

Click

Click

to increase

to decrease minute.

Press Set to select the 35 in


increase second. Click

Click

to

to decrease second.

1. The operator could press

or

on the control panel to

select hour-11 , minute-19, or second-35 in

Reminder
2. Press

on the control panel equals to clicking

indicates increase; Press


clicking

, which

on the control panel equals to

, which indicates decrease.

5 Interface language: Select system interface languagen of Chinese, English.


.
Chinese: PressSetto select
.
English: PressSetto select
6 Screen Saver: Set up the time span from No Operation to Screen Saver
63

Chapter 8 System Preset

Startup. Click the [Screen Saver] drop-down box to select the time.
7 Auto clear of measurement and characters:
. It indicates that all measurements and
Check
characters in the image area are automatically cleared after defreezing.
Uncheck
. It indicates that all measurements
and characters are kept after defreezing.
8 Hide parameter list
Check:
. It indicates not displaying image parameters on
the right of the image area.
Uncheck:
the right of the image area.

. It indicates displaying image parameters on

9 OK: ClickOK,save the settings and exit the general interface.


10 Cancel: ClickCancel,exit the general interface without saving settings.
11 Apply: Click Apply,save the settings without exiting the general interface.

8.3 Device

Reminder

1. On this interface, the operator could preset AGC, printer, auto


freeze, TGC curve and beep of key, etc.
2. The operator must click OK or Applyafter setting in order to
save the settings.

Click Device and the Device interface pops up, as shown in Figure 8.3-1.

64

Chapter 8 System Preset

Figure 8.3-1 Device


1 Printer setup: ClickSet Printerand the printer setup interface pops up, as figure
8.3-2.

65

Chapter 8 System Preset

Figure 8.3-2 Set Printer


Printers List: List of printers currently installed. The operator could choose a
printer from the list and set it as Report Printer and Video Printer.
Report Printer: The printer used to printer patient report on the Measurement
Report interface or Patient Data Report interface.
Video printer used for printing images: when the desired image is intercepted, the
operator could press Print or the printing switch of the video printer and print
out the current information on the monitor screen from the video printer.
<Set the printer to be selected as the printer connected to the ultrasound equipment>

Reminder

1. Only laser or inkjet printer could be set as Report Printer.


2. Only digital video printer could be set as Video Printer.

Select the printer connected to the ultrasound equipment in Printer List click
in Video
in
Report Printer, and set the printer as Report Printer; If click
Printer, then the printer is set as Video Printer clickOKorApply, as shown
in below figure.

66

Chapter 8 System Preset

Figure 8.3-3 Set Report Printer

Figure 8.3-4 Set Video Printer


<Cancel the current printer>
As shown in the below figure, click
to cancel the current Report Printer.

in Report Printer clickOKorApply

Figure 8.3-5 Cancel the Current Report Printer


As shown in the below figure, click
to cancel the current Video Printer.

in Video Printer clickOKorApply

Figure 8.3-6 Cancel the current video printer.

67

Chapter 8 System Preset

2 Auto freeze: Set the time between no operation and system auto freeze. Click
the [Auto Freeze] drop-down box and select the required item.
3 TGC line display: Set the time between TGC line display and TGC line
disappear. Click the [Show TGC line] drop-down box and select.
4 Beep of keys: Set the beep of keys as open or close. Click the [Beep of Key]
drop-down box and select.
5 Foot switch 1: Set the function of foot switch 1. Click the [Foot Switch] drop-down
box and select. Options include Freeze, Print, Probe Select, Image Store,
Cine Store.
6 Ok: ClicOKto save the parameters and exit the Device interface.
7 Cancel: ClickCancel, exit the Device interface without saving the
settings.
8 Apply: ClickApplyto save the settings without exiting the Device
interface.

8.4 Network

Reminder

1. On this screen, the operator could set the computer name, work
group and IP address.
2. After setting, the operator must click OK or Apply to save
the settings.

ClickNetworkand the Network screen pops up, as shown in Figure 8.4-1.

68

Chapter 8 System Preset

Figure 8.4-1 Network


1 Computer name: Set computer name, click the [Computer Name] edit box and
input the new computer name.
2 Work group: Set work group name, click the [workgroup] edit box and input the
new work group name.
3 Automatically obtain IP address from DHCP server: Check this item, press Set
and click OK, then the system will obtain IP address automatically through
DHCP server.

Reminder

If the system supports dynamic IP address allocation, it is suggested


to check Obtain IP address from DHCP server.
It is not recommended to check Specify an IP address unless the
operator knows the how to manually set IP address.

4 Set IP address: Check this item and the operator could manually set IP address.
69

Chapter 8 System Preset

Parameters that should be set are:


IP address: The system supports TCP/IP protocol, and IP address is the
unique communication symbol by which the system runs TCP/IP protocol in
the network.
Subnet mask code: Together with IP address, subnet mask code divides IP
address into two parts, network address and host address. The default
subnet mask code for type A network (1-126) is 255-0-0-0; Default for type B
network (128 - 191) is 255-255-0-0; Default for type C network192 - 223is
255-255-255-0.
Gateway: Gateway is an IP address connecting one network to other
networks.
DHCP server: It refers to Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and is used to
realize automatic allocation of IP address.
5 Network test: Click Response Checkand the Response Check interface for
network test pops up, as shown in Figure 8.4-2.

Figure 8.4-2 Response Check


Input other confirmed IP addresses in the edit box on the up left corner, then
click Check to test if the system is connected to the network.
6 OK: Click OK, save settings and exit the network interface.
7 Cancel: Click Cancel, exit the network screen without saving settings.
8 Apply: Click Apply, save settings without exiting the network interface.

70

Chapter 8 System Preset

8.5 DICOM

Reminder

1. The operator could preset name of the equipment, IP address of


DICOM server, DICOM server port and name of DICOM server.
2. After setting, the operator must click OKorApplyto save the
settings.

Dicom 3.0 is the industrial protocol by which image and other information communicate
and transmit among different medical devices. After connecting to PACS, the ultrasound
equipment could transmit and receive required images and related information.
Click DICOMand the DICOM interface pops up, as shown in Figure 8.5-1.

Figure 8.5-1 DICOM


1 Ultrasound Equipment AE Title: Click [AE Title] to enter the title of this
71

Chapter 8 System Preset

2
3
4
5
6
7

ultrasound equipment
DICOM Server: Click the [DICOM Server] edit box to enter IP address of the
DICOM server and realize transmission through DICOM.
Port: Click the [Port] edit box to enter the port of the DICOM server.
Host AE Title: Click the [AE Tile] edit box to enter the title of the DICOM server.
OK: ClickOKto save settings and exit the DICOM interface.
Cancel: ClickCancelto exit the DICOM interface without saving settings.
Apply: ClickApplyto save settings without exiting the DICOM interface.

8.6 Storage
1. On this interface, the maximum frame of cineloop videos, image
storage format, storage folder of image or measurement report could
be preset. New storage folders could also be added through network.
2. The operator must clickOKor click Applyto save the settings.
ClickStorageand the Storage interface pops
up, as in Figure 8.6-1.

Figure 8.6-1 Storage

72

Chapter 8 System Preset

1 Video setup: set up the maximum video frames. Click the [MAX.Frames]
drop-down box to choose maximum video frames. The larger the video frame,
the more system recourses occupied and the longer it takes for video storage
and video output.
2 Image Storage Format: Set the file format for image storage. Click the [Image
Format] drop-down box, select the required item. Choices are JPG, BMP,
which represents JPG format and BMP format respectively.
3 OK: Click OK, save settings and exit the Device interface.
4 Cancel: ClickCancel, directly exit the Device interface without saving
settings.
5 Apply: Click Apply, save settings without exiting the Device interface.

8.7 Application Setting

Reminder

1. The operator could preset the title and parameters of each


Application on this interface. The preset parameters would be
loaded at the same time when Application is started.
2. The operator must click OKorApplyto save the presettings.

ClickApplicationand the Application setting interface pops up, as shown in Figure


8.7-1.

Figure 8.7-1 Application Setting


1 List of Applications: Ten applications are listed, with default titles being: Abdomen,
Gynecology, Obstetrics, Cardiac, Small art, Limb, User1, User2, User3
73

Chapter 8 System Preset

and User4.
2 Get Current Condition: Press Set to choose the application in the list, then click
Get Current Condition, and all parameters of the application update into the
current parameters of the main system. Click OKwhen the following dialog box
pops up.
3 Edit Data: Press Setto select the application on the list. ClickEdit Datato edit
and modify the application parameters, as shown in Figure 8.7-3:

Figure 8.7-2 Edit Data

Refer to 8.7.1 Edit Data Image for details.


Refer to8.7.2 Edit Data Display for details.
74

Chapter 8 System Preset

6
7
8

8.7.1

Refer to 8.7.3 Edit Data -Body Mark for details.


Refer to 8.7.4 Edit Data Measurement for details.
Refer to 8.7.5 Edit Data Annotation for details.
OK: Click OK,save settings and exit the Edit data page.
Cancel:ClickCancel,exit the Edit data interface without saving the settings.
Apply:ClickApply,save settings without exiting the Edit data interface.
Edit name: PressSetto select the application in the list. Then click Edit Name
and the operator could change the title of the application. The operator could also
change the title of the application by first pressing Setto select and pressing
Setagain.
Get default condition: Press Setto select the application in the list, then click
Get Default Conditionand all parameters for this application update into the
ex-works settings of the equipment. When the below dialog box pops up, just click
OK.
OK: Click OK,save settings and exit the Application Setting interface.
Cancel: Click Cancel,exit the Application Setting interface without saving
settings.
Apply: Click Apply,save settings without exiting the Application Setting

Edit Data-Image
Please refer to 7.3.1 Menu in real-time state for details of the
majority of parameters set on this interface. Explanations on
parameters not involved in 7.3.1 Menu in real-time state are
provided separately. Operation methods are described below:
On the Application Setting interface, pressSetto select the application in the list. The
operator may edit parameters of the application by clicking Edit Data. Click Image
and the operator may set up parameters on the image interface, as shown in Figure
8.7.1-1.

75

Chapter 8 System Preset

8.7.1-1 Edit Data-Image


1 Initial Mode: Click the [Initial Mode] drop-down box and select Fundamental or
THI from the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 8.7.1-2.
2 Dynamic Range: Click the [Dynamic Range] drop-down box and select dynamic
range values in the pop-up menu.
Please refer to 7.3.1 Menu page II- in real-time state for detailed
explanations of Dynamic Range.
3 Frames Average: Click the [Frames Average] drop-down box, select frames
average level.
2 for detailed
Please refer to 7.3.1 Menu in real-time state, page II-
explanations of Frames Average.
4 B/W Invert:Click the [B/W Invert] drop-down box, select Normal or Invert.
Normal indicates not activating the B/W Invert.
Invert indicates activating the B/W Invert, namely, performing inversion of
76

Chapter 8 System Preset

image gray scale to turn black into white and vice versa.
Please refer to 7.3.1 Menu in real-time state, page II-
3 for detailed
explanations of B/W Invert.
5 US Power : Click the [US Power] drop-down box, select Low, Middle or High
in the pop-up menu.
6 Edge Enhance Click the [Edge Enhance] drop-down box, select the level of
edge enhancement in the pop-up menu.
Please refer to 7.3.1 Menu in real-time state, page -
3 for detailed
explanations of Edge Enhance.
7 Lines Average: Click the [Lines Average] drop-down box, select the required
level of Lines Average. Choices are Low, Middle, High.
2 for detailed
Please refer to 7.3.1 Menu in real-time state, page -
explanations of Lines Average.
8 Pre Gray: Click the [Pre Gray] drop-down box, select the required level of Pre
Gray in the pop-up menu. Choices are 015.
The higher the level of Pre Gray, the brighter the image is.
2 for detailed
Please refer to 7.3.1 Menu in real-time state, page -
explanations of Pre Gray.
9 Gain: Set the value of Gain, with a range of 0100. There are two operations to
adjust Gain:
, then continuously press

Operation 1: Click
or

to decrease Gain, or continuously press

or

to

increase Gain.
Operation 2: Move the cursor onto
continuously press Set to move

, then
toward

and thus changes Gain.

Please refer to 8.7.1 Adjustment of Total Gain for detailed explanations.


10
Gamma correct:Set the value of Gamma Correct, which has a range of 0
30. There are two operations to set the value:
Operation 1: Click
or

, then continuously press

to decrease Gamma correct, or continuously press

or

to increase Gamma correct.

77

Chapter 8 System Preset

, then

Operation 2: Move the cursor to


continuously press Set to move

toward

,and thus change the value

of Gamma correct.
Please refer to 7.3.1 Menu in real-time state, page -
3 for detailed
explanations of Gamma Correct.
11
Contrast: Set the value of Contrast,
Contrast.

there are two operations to change

, then continuously press

Operation 1: Click
or

to decrease Contrast, or continuously press

or

to

increase Contrast.
Operation 2: Move the cursor to
continuously press Setto move

, then
toward

and thus change Contrast.

3 for detailed explanations


Please refer to 7.3.1 Menu in real-time state, -
of Contrast.
12
Brightness: Set the value of Brightness,There are two operations to set
Brightness.
Operation 1: Click
or

, then continuously press

to decrease Brightness, or continuously press

or

to increase Brightness.
, then

Operation 2: Move the cursor to


continuously press Set to move

toward

, and thus change

Brightness.
1 for detailed explanations
Please refer to 7.3.1 Menu in real-time state, -
of Brightness.
13
Probe Setting initialize:
Check
indicates loading transducer parameters at the
same time of loading parameters of the application.
Uncheck
indicates not loading transducer parameters
78

Chapter 8 System Preset

while loading parameters of the application.


Please refer to 8.1 Probe for setting probe parameters.

8.7.2

Edit Data - Display

Reminder

Please refer to 7.3.1 Menu in real-time state for details of the


majority of parameters set on this interface. Explanations of
parameters not involved in 7.3.1 Function menu in real-time state
are provided
separately. Operation methods are described as below:

On the Application Setting screen, pressSetto select the item in the list. The operator
may edit parameters of the item by clicking Edit Data. Click Display and the operator
may set parameters on the Display interface, as shown in Figure 8.7.2-1.

8.7.2-1 Edit Data-Display


1Orientation: Click the [Left/Right] drop-down box, select Left or Right from the
pop-up menu.
2Up/Down: Click the [Up/Down] drop-down box, select Up or Down from the
pop-up menu.
79

Chapter 8 System Preset

390 deg Rotation: Click the [90 deg Rotation] drop-down box, select No or Yes
in the pop-up menu.
4M Speed: M Speed indicates the speed by which image in M mode moves. It
applies to B/M mode and M mode only. Click the [M Speed] drop-down box,
select Low, Middle, or High from the pop-up menu.

8.7.3

Edit Data - Body Mark


< Operation procedures for setting and applying body marks >
1 Enter to Preset ClickApplication Choose Some PartsFor exmaple
Abdomen ClickEdit DataClick Body Mark. As shown in figure

Figure 8.7.3-1 Setting body mark


2 Setting Body Mark of Abdomen. As shown in figure 8.7.3-2

Figure 8.7.3-2 Result of Body Mark Setting


3 UseFunc9key combination to start Abdomen, Please refer to 7.8 Func key
combination for detailed explanations of it.
4 PresetBody Markcontinuously, Result as shown in figure

Figure 8.7.3-3 Result of Body Mark Display


By the figure 8.7.3-2 and 8.7.3-3, Result of Body Mark Setting and Display is
corresponding.
80

Chapter 8 System Preset

<Operation Method>
On the Application Setting page, press Setto select the item in the list. Click Edit
Data and the operator could set up parameters of the item. Click the Body Mark
page and the operator could set up parameters on that page, as shown in figure
8.7.3-1

Figure8.7.3-4Edit Data-Body Mark


1Display on at initial:
Check

: Displays body marks after loading application

settings on the main screen through theFuncbutton.


Uncheck

: Not display body marks after loading

81

Chapter 8 System Preset

application settings on the main screen through theFuncbutton.


< Details of Body Marks >
Body marks are separated into ten groups . They are Abdomen, Gynecologic,
Obstetric, Cardiac, Vascular, Urology, Thyroid and Breast, Small Parts, Cranial,
Musculosk. Press Set to click the group name, and the body marks in this group
will be displayed on the right.
2Selected Body Mark:
<Operation Method>
Four body marks could be set up at the most, in the following procedures:
aSelect the location of the body mark which is labled No1, No2, No3, or No4.
For example, select No1.
bSelect the group of the required body mark from the list on the left, for example,
Abdomen, Gynecologic, Obstetric, Cardiac . There are ten groups all
together. Please refer to details of body marks.
c Select the required body mark in the column on the right, click it and save it to
location No1.
dFollow procedure 1~3 to continue to set up location No2, No3 and No4.
eClick OK,save settings and back out of the Application Settingscreen. A
graphic operation flow is as below:

82

Chapter 8 System Preset

Fig 8.7.3-5 Select Body Mark


To cancel the selected body mark, choose its location No1, No2, No3 or No4,
then click Mark off. A graphic operation flow for cancelling location No1 is as
below.

83

Chapter 8 System Preset

Figure 8.7.3-6 Mark off


Mark off:To cancel the selected body mark , as shown in figure 8.7.3-3.

8.7.4

Edit Data - Measurement


On the Application Setting screen, press Set to select the item in the list. Click
Edit Data and the operator can set up the parameters of this item. Click the
Measurement page, as shown in figue 8.7.4-1.

84

Chapter 8 System Preset

Figure 8.7.4-1 Edit Data-Measurement


1Region: Click [Region] dropdown box. Choices are Abdomen, Gynecologic,
Obstetric, Cardiac, Vascular, Urology, Thyroid and Breast, Small Parts, Cranial,
Musculosk, which correspond to the choices on the Edit Data-Measurement
page

2Distance

Key

(B

and

B/B

Mode):
and

In

B,

B/B

mode,

click

choices are Distance, Angle, Ratio,

Stenosis.

85

Chapter 8 System Preset

,and

3Area Key (B and B/B Mode): Click

Choices

areTrace, Rectangle, Ellipse, Volume[Trace], Volume[Ellipse], Volume[Bi-Plane],


Ration, Stenosis[Trance], Stenosis[Ellipse].
4Distance Key (M and B/M Mode): In M and B/M Mode, Click
, and choices are Heart Rate, Time, Slope,
Distance, Stenosis.
5Ratio/Stenosis: The basis for calculating Ratio/Stenosis isBy Girth or By Area,
ehich refers to the circumference and area of the measured region.
6Volume:

Click

measurement.
7Histogram:

for

setting

Volume

Choices are By Ellipse , By Trace or By BiPlane.


Setting
the
display
of
Histogram.
to choose On or Off.

Click

8.7.5

.Method

Edit Data - Annotation


On the Application Setting page, press Setto select the item in the list. Then click
Edit Dataand the operator could set the parameters of the item. Click Annotation, as
shown in Figure 8.7.5-1.

Figure 8.7.5-1 Edit Data-Annotation

86

Chapter 8 System Preset

This screen is used to set up body marks deployed by ten groups of quick buttons. Click
the edit box on the interface and the operator could directly put in characters. Press
Texton the system main interface to deploy characters and the characters of the
menu button is the same as what is set in Edit Data-Annotation. The corresponding
relationship is shown below:

Figure 8.7.5-2 Text Mark

87

Chapter 8 System Preset

8.8 Obstetric Tables


Internationally accepted formula for GA and FW are used. GA and GW that
correspond to the series of measured values for each and every measured
region are calculated in advance and saved in tables of the system. When
measuring GA or FW, the operator should first select a formula from Preset.
After taking measurement of a region, the system will compare the
measured values with the table corresponding to the selected formula and
give the GA and FW. Please refer to 8.8 Fetal Parameter for the setting of
GA and FW formulae.
This interface provides the tables that each formula corresponds to for each
measured region.

8.8.1

Obstetric Tables InterfaceGA Table


On the System Preset screen, clickObstetric Tablesand the Obstetric Tables screen
pops up, as shown in Figure 8.8.1-1.

Figure 8.8.1-1 GA Table


88

Chapter 8 System Preset

1Measurement item: Measurement items are based on measured regions.


Measurment results and formula used combine to determine GA and FW.
2Age table: ClickAge table. The screen Age table pops up and shows the Age
table that corresponds to the selected measurement item and formula, as shown
in Figure 8.8.1-1.
3Click Growth Table. The Growth Table screen pops up and gives the Growth
Table that corresponds to the selected measurement item and formula, as
shown in Figure 8.8.2.
4Each measurement item corresponds to multiple calculation formulas. Click the
drop-down box to select the particular formula.
5Edit Table
Operation of edit table:
Choose a measurement item. Refer to Figure 8.8.1-2;
Input the title of the new table in the textbox in Edit Table;
Click New Table, and a new table is created. In the meantime, data in the
old table is saved. The operator could modify the in Record.
In the previous step, the operator could also create a new table by
clickingin the New Tabledrop-down box (shown in Figure 8.8.1-4) , then
clicking the New Empty Table. This way, data in the old table are not saved.
Please refer to (6)Record for inputting data.

Reminder

The new table must have a different name than the old ones. Otherwise,
reminder such as Table in existence. Please input a new name will come up
when the operator clicks New Table.
The operator must select the measurement item for the table to be created.
The newly created table is equal to a new calculation formula for one
measurement item. No new measurement items can be created.

6Record
Table content edit box: When creating a new table, click each line of the table
and
the corresponding information displays in the table content edit box. Now, the
operator only need to input the new data in the edit box and click Register to
update the content of the corresponding rows in the table.
If click each row of the table, then click Delete, the operator could delete the
corresponding content in the table.
7OK/Cancel/Application
OK: After editing Age tables, click OK, save result and quit the Obstetric
Tables interface.
Cancel: Click Cancel, exit the Obstetric Tables interface without saving
results.
Application: After editing Age table, Click Application, save result without
exiting the Obstetric Tables interface.
89

Chapter 8 System Preset

8.8.2

Obstetric Tables Growth Table


On the System Preset screen, click Obstetric Tables and the Obstetric Tables
screen pops up, clickGrowth Table again as shown in Figure 8.7.2-1.

Figure 8.8.2-1 Growth Table


1Measurement item: Measurement items are based on measured region.
Measurment results and formula used combine to determine GA and FW.
2Data display column
3Calculation formula display. Each measurement item corresponds to multiple
calculation formulas. Click the drop-down box, and the operator could select
the particular formula.
4Edit Table
Operation of editing table:
(a)Choose a measurement item.
90

Chapter 8 System Preset

(b)Input the name of the new table in the textbox of [Edit Table]; The name is
displayed in the above drop-down menu too.
(c)Click New Tableto create a new table and save the data in the old table.
The operator could modify the date in the table through Record.
(d)In the previous step, the operator could also create a new table by clicking
the New Tabledrop-down box (as shown in Figure 8.7.2-4) , then clicking
the New Empty Table. Data in the old table will not be saved. Refer to Record
for inputting data in the empty table.
(e)Rename :ClickRenameto rename the new table.
(f)Delete:ClickDeleteto delete a new table.

Reminder

The new table must have a different name than the old ones. Otherwise, the
system will remind Table in existence. Please input another name;
The operator must select the measurement item for the table to be created.
The newly created table is equal to a new calculation formula for one
measurement
item. No new measurement items can be created.

5Record: Data input column


When creating a new table, click each line of the table and the corresponding
information displays in the table content edit box. Now, the operator only need to
input the new data in the edit box and click Register to update the content
of
the corresponding rows in the table.
If click each row of the table, then click Delete, the operator could delete the
corresponding content in the table.
6Rank:Data input column
Select SD or % in Rank. If SD is chosen, please input the SD value of
data; If is chosen, please input the maximum and minimum percentage
value of data.
Note: SD and % both refer to the deviation of fetal growth curve.
7Fetal Growth Curve: Select the measurement item and choose one
corresponding formula and a fetal growth curve is shown. Refer to 16.1
Gynecology Report for details of the curve.
8OK/Cancel/Application
(a) OK: After editing the Age table, click OK, save results and exit the
Obstetric Tables interface.
(b) Cancel: Click Cancel, exit the Obstetric Tables interface withoug saving
results.
(c) Application: After editing the Growth table, clickApplication, save the
result without quiting the Obstetric Tables interface.

8.8.3

Check Table
<Operation>
91

Chapter 8 System Preset

Operations for checking Table are: Select Age table or Growth table, Select
measured region Select calculation formula Display the corresponding table.
Shown in the below figure:

Figure 8.8.3-1 Check Growth Table

8.8.4

Create user-defined Table


For each measurement item, the system provides four groups of user-defined tables.
The user could create tables based on need. Once created, the table could be chosen as
the basis for calculating GA and FW, just as the table provided by the system.
<Operation>
Operation procedures for creating user-defined Table are: Select Age table or
Growth table Select measurement item Input the Name of user-defined table
Create user-defined table Edit user-defined tableSave edited table. Shown as
the below figure:

92

Chapter 8 System Preset

Figure 8.8.4-1 Creating user-defined Growth table


Folow the same procedure to create user-defined Age table.

8.9 Fetal Parameter


1. In obstetrical measurement, GA is estimated through measurement and
calculation of some body parts. The operator could preset the measured
region, measurement methods and formula on this screen.
2. After preset, the operator must click OKor Application to save
the settings.

8.9.1

Details of the Fetal Parameter Interface


Click Fetal Parameter,the Fetal Parameter screen pops up, as shown in Figure
8.9.1-1.

93

Chapter 8 System Preset

Figure 8.9.1-1 The Fetal Parameter Interface


1For details of measured region, please refer to 8.9.2 Setting obstetrics
measurement region.
2Name:
3Tools: Select the GA/FW measurement tools, including Distance,
Circumference, Area and Calculation. The operator could select the proper
measurement tools based on needs.
4Unit: Measurement unit, including mm, cm, Cm2, g, %, ml. It varies with
the different selection of Tools; The operator could also set the measurement
units according based on needs.
5Methods: Select the GA/FW measurement methods, including Line, Trace,
Ellipse and Rectangle. The operator could select proper measurement tools
according to needs. If the drop-down box is grayed, it indicates there are no
GA/GW methods to choose for the measured parts.
94

Chapter 8 System Preset

6Age table: Select the GA formula. If the drop-box is grayed, it indicates that there
are no GA formulas to choose for the measured parts.
7Growth table: Select the FW formula. If the drop-down box is grayed, it indicates
that there are no FW formulas to choose for the measured parts.
8Order: Arrange the measured parts in Figure 8.9.1-1 in a new order. Select one
measured part from the list, then click the icon beneath Order to move the part
to the corresponding position. As shown in Figure 8.9.1-2, they are Move Top,
Move Previous, Move Next, Move Last from left to right.

Figure 8.9.1-2 Order


9Exchange: Select one part from the list on the left, clickExchange, and the
operator could switch the list upside down.
10 Register: After editing Fetal Parameter, click Registerto save result.
11 Equation: Calculation formula. This item provides the user with the
appropriate FWeight/GA equation to choose from. Or, the operator could define
and use his/her own equation/formula. Refer to 8.9.4 Calculation Formula for
details.
12 New Parameter/Delete Para.
New Parameter: Create new measurement item. ClickNew Parameter
, and the
interface in Figure 8.9.1-3 pops up.

Figure 8.9.1-3 New Fetal Parameter


Operation as below:
95

Chapter 8 System Preset

(a) Input the title of the newly created measurement item in the Name text box;
(b) Select measurement tools, unit and methods (when the selection in Tool is
Calculation, the Method drop-down box is grayed, which means its not
selectable). Please refer to Setting for detailed operation.
(c) Edit calculation formula: Refer to 8.9.4 Calculation Formula for details.
Delete Para: Delete newly created measurement items. Select newly created
measurement items in the above Figure (1), click Delete Para.and the
operator could delete the newly created measurement item.
13
OK/Cancel/Application
(a) OK: After the above operation, Click OK, save result and exit the Fetal
Parameter interface.
(b) Cancel: ClickCancel, quit the Fetal Parameter interface without saving the
result.
(c) Application: After above operation, clickApplication, save result without
exiting the Fetal Parameter interface.

Reminder

8.9.2

After editing Fetal parameter, the operator must clickRegister


first, then save. Otherwise, editing result may not be saved.

Set obstetric measurement region


Check the measured region on the left column of Figure 8.8.1-1 and click Save to
save. When performing obstetrics measurement, the measurd item is the same as the
measured region checked here, shown as below Figure:

96

Chapter 8 System Preset

Figure 8.9.2-1 Set obstetric measurement region

Reminder

8.9.3

If none of the measured regions is checked, then the first 18 regions


will be displayed when obstetric measurement is carried out.
What is shown in the figure is the method of setting Early Gestation
measurement. Setting of the Fetal Para & AFI measurement parts is
the same.

Set obstetric measurement method


<Operation>
Select regionSelect Age table, Growth table, Tools, Methods Click
Register click OK/Application, shown in Figure 8.9.3-1.

97

Chapter 8 System Preset

Figure 8.9.3-1 Set obstetric measurement method


If the Measurement is Distance, the operator could select Line as the Method.
If the Measurements is Area or Circumference, the operator could choose Trace,
Ellipse or Rectangle as the Method.

Reminder

8.9.4

What is shown in the figure is the measurement method for Early


Gestation. The method of measuring Fetal Parameter and AFI is the
same.

Calculation Equation

Figure 8.9.4-1 Calculation formula


< Operation >
Choose the measured part Edit equation click

to verify the rationality of

the equation click Register click save to save equation.


<Input>
1 Choose variables of calculation formula: Click
measured part from the drop-down edit box.
2 Equation Edit Box: To edit equation.
98

to select the

Chapter 8 System Preset

3 Equation Verification: Click

to verify the rationality of equation.

Variables in the edited equation must be parameters currently included in the


system. If the variables are beyond the range, the system will remind that the
edited equation is in valid.
4 Fetal Weight Equation: When the selected equation is named Fetal Weight, click
to set fetal weight equation from the drop-down edit boxes.
5 Select:This drop-down box is usable when the selected part is Fetal Para. The
drop-down menu shows 8 FW formulas.Click

to set the FW

equation from the drop-down edit box. The FW equations are editable by the
method in <Input>.

8.10 Backup Data


On this screen, the operator could back up the current settings into
the Hard drive or the USB drive, or load previously saved settings into
the system.
Saved files are put in folders named Backup_yymmdd , whereas
yy stands for year, mm stands for month and dd stands for
day. For example, files backed up on Aug. 9th, 2006 are saved in the
folder Backup_060809.
On the System Preset screen, click Backup Data, the below screen pops up.

Figure 8.10-1 Backup Data


99

Chapter 8 System Preset

1 Refresh Disks: When plugging the USB driver but the [Disk Drivers] drop-down
box didnt show the drive, clickRefresh Disks.
<Operation>
Directly clickRefresh Disks, as shown below

Figure 8.10 -2 Refresh Disks


2 Save: save the current setting to the Hard drive or the USB drive
<Operation>
Click the [Disk Drivers] drop-down box, select the target partition to save to
clickSaveclick OKin the dialog box that pops up after a successful
backup, shown in below Figure.

Figure 8.10 -3 Save


3 Load: Load previous back-up settings to the system
<Operation>
Click the [Disk Drivers] drop-down box to select the partition of the backup
fileclick Loadto get the source of backupclick the back-up source
drop-down box to select historic backup filesclickExecuteclick OK
in the pup-up question boxclickOKin the dialog box that pops up after a
successful loading, shown as below Figure.

100

Chapter 8 System Preset

Figure 8.10 -4 Load

Reminder

The Load button works only after Save. Otherwise, the system will remind:
No data found at following disk.
Download from CD-ROM is selectable only after CD is inserted. Othersie,
the system will remind: No disc in CD-ROM driver. CD-ROM is readable only.

4 Exit:ClickExitto exit the Backup Data interface.

8.11 Misc.Tools
On the System Preset screen, click Misc.Tools, and the Misc. Tools page pops up,
as shown in figure 8.11-1

Figure8.11-1 Password
Input servicetool for the password, then clickOKto enter the Misc.Tools interface as
shown in figure 8.11-2
101

Chapter 8 System Preset

Figure8.11-2 Misc.Tools
Upgrade:Upgrade the system.
Version: The version of the current software.
Reset: Reset all parameters as the ex-works default.
Set Biopsy Guide Line: Setting Biopsy Guide Line function.
Set Video Card: Setting Video Card function.
Check Hard Disk: This screen shows the state of the C drive.
Swap Trackball Key:Change Trackball key . Choice for Left or Right to adapte
different user. If select Left, and then click Swap Trackball Key, now you can
apply to the format of left key. It is means that use left key to operate each
function in system; If select Right, and then click Swap Trackball Key, now
you can apply to the format of Right key. It is means that use Right key to
operate each function in system;
8 Printers: Manage printers, include Addding new printer ,deleting printer and so
on. Please refer to 8.11.3 Printers for details.
9 OK:After setting, clickOKto display a dialog box, as shown in following figure:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Figure 8.11-4 Confirmation


102

Chapter 8 System Preset

If the Diver C is under write-protection, select Yesto save the modification and
reboot.
If the Diver C is under write-protection, select Noto cancel the modification and exit
the Mics.Tools interface.

!
Notice

If diver C is under write-protection, the operator must select OK


to save the modification and reboot system, and the modification
can be saved.
If diver C is not under write-protection, the modification of C diver
can be saved directly. The default of diver C is write-protection.

8.11.1 Upgrade

Figure 8.11.1 -1 Upgrade interface


<Operation>
1. Select the system upgrade source. The system provides four ways of upgrading:
Use floppy driver. Click the choose box in front of FLOPPY,

Use USB driver. Click the choose box in front of USB Disk,
Use network. Click the choose box in front of Network,
2. Type servicetool for the password and Click Next..
3. Click Next.

.
.

103

Chapter 8 System Preset

8.11.2 Set Biopsy Guide Line

Reminder

When using one transducer, only after the Biopsy Guide Line function
is set can the screen shows Biopsy Guide Line after pressing
Guide. The screen provides the set up function.

On the System Preset screen, click Misc.Tools, input servicetool for the password
to enter the Misc. Tools screen. Then clickSet Biopsy Guide Lineand the following
screen pops up:

Figure8.11.2-1 Set Biopsy Guide Line


1Register: Register Guide Line function for transducers so that when using
transducers, the screen could display Biopsy Guide Line when the operator
presses Guide.
<Operation>
Click [Probe Name] drop-down box to select transducer typeChoose Adapter
Type as Fix or Variable Set Distance , Angleand DepthClick
RegisterclickOK, as shown as below:

104

Chapter 8 System Preset

Figure8.11.2-2 Register-Fix Angle

Figure8.11.2-3 Register-Variable Angle

1. When setting up Distance, Angle and Depth, click


value increases, click

and the

and the value decreases. The operator

could also directly click the corresponding edit box and key in values.
2. Angle indicates the angle between the Biopsy Guide Line and
the vertical direction. When Fix Angle is chosen for Adapter Type,
the angle is fixed.
3. When the Adapter Type is set to be Variable Angle , four angles
and keep in the degree of angle in
could be set. Choose four
the [Angle] Edit Box respectively to complete setting up four angles.
2Delete: Cancel the Guide Line function of a transducer so that when using the
105

Chapter 8 System Preset

transducer again, the Biopsy Guide Line doesnt display when theGuide
button is pressed.
<Operation>
Click to choose the transducer to be rid of the Guide Line function in the list of
registered transducers clickDeleteclickOK. Shown as below

Figure8.11.2-4 Delete
3Distance: The distance between the fixed point and the center of elements.
Angle: The angle between the center of elements and the Biopsy Guide Line
which passes through the fixed point is expressed as , which is the value of
Angle.
Depth: The distance between the fixed point and the Surface of Probe

8.11.3 Printers
On the System Preset interface, click Misc.Toolsand input servicetool for the
password to enter the Misc Tools interface. Then click Printersand the following
figure pops up:

106

Chapter 8 System Preset

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Figure 8.11.3-1 Printers


Printers List: Display the list of currently installed printers
Add Printer: Add new printer driver program. Refer to 8.11.3.1 Add Printer.
Delete Printer: Select the title of the printer in the Printers List, then click
Delete Printer to delete the printer driver. Refer to 8.11.3.1 Add Printer.
Properties: Select printer in the list, then click Properties to set the properties of
the printer. Refer to 8.11.3.3 Setting Printer Properties.

8.11.3.1 Printer
On the System Preset Misc. Tools Printers interface, click Add Printer
and the following interface pops up:

Figure 8.11.3.1-1 Add Printer


(1)
(2)

(3)

Printer Ports: The type of port that transfer data between the printer and the
ultrasound.
Printer Name: Assign a name to the newly installed printer. When add
printer is completed, the printer name will show in the Printers List on the
System preset Misc. Tools Printers interface. In the meantime, it shows
on the Printer List on the System Preset Device Set Printer interface.
Printer drivers: The operator could directly input the path of the printer driver
in the edit box or click

(4)
(5)

to browse until the printer driver path is located.

Display the name of the printer driver installation file


Display the printer type description included in the printer driver.

107

Chapter 8 System Preset

<Steps for adding printer>


1. Selelct printer port:
Select the corresponding port in compliance with the means of data transfer
between the printer and the ultrasound equipment.
2. Confirm the printer driver path
Approach 1: Input the printer driver path directly in the edit box
Approach 2: Click

to browse.

3. Install Printer Driver:


Click OKand the following dialog box pops up. Go to Continue Anyway
to install the printer driver.
4. Reboot to validate the setup
After the printer driver installation is completed, clickOKto return to the
System Preset Misc. Tools Printers, where the newly added printer is
found in the Printers List. ClickOKon the interface to return to System
Preset Misc. Tools. Click OKon the interface again and the following
dialog box pops up:

Figure 8.11.3.1-4 Information


Click Y to reboot the system and validate the setup. The default of drive C is
under write protection. Changes to drive C could be saved only through this
operation. Please refer to 8.10 Misc. Tools for details.

8.11.3.2 Delete Printer


<Operation Procedure>
1. Open up the System Preset Misc. Tools Printers interface and select the
printer name in the Printers List.
2. Click Delete Printerto delete the printer.
3. Click OKto exit to the System Preset Misc. Tools interface, then click
OK in the interface, and the reminder box pops up as shown in Figure
8.11.3.1-4 Information. Click Yin the reminder box and the system reboots
and validate delete printer.

108

Chapter 8 System Preset

After deleting printer, the printer name will be removed from the
Printers List in the System Preset Misc. Tools Printers interface.
In the meantime, the printer name is removed from the Printers List
in the System Preset Device Set Printer interface.

8.11.3.3 Setting Printer Properties


<Operation Procedure>
1. Open the System Preset Misc. Tool Printers interface and select the
printer name in the Printers List.
2. Click Propertiesand the following interface for setting printer properties pops
up. Click Printing Preferencesand the operator could set up the printers.
Refer to the printer user manual for details.

109

Chapter 9 New Patient

Chapter 9 New Patient


Press

and the New patient interface shows up, as figure 9-1.

Please input or change settings as described in (1) - (13). After completing all setups, please
confirm by clicking OK.
Click Cancelto cancel the input or changes

Figure 9-1 New Patient


1 New, Edit
New: Click New, input an new patient information;
110

Chapter 9 New Patient

Edit: Click Edit, edit original patient information.


2 Patient ID
Input patient ID, Maximum 20 characters
Patient name
Please put in the name of the patient examined. Maximum 30 characters
3 The system will automatically display the current time and the total number of
patients today.
4 Basic information of patient
Input Birth Data (yy/mm/dd)
To select format and input sequence of birth data according to the settings of
system preset.
a Input Birth Date yyyy.MM.dd

Input yyyy
Input the four digit year (the Gregorian calendar) with the numeric keys
on the keyboard.

Input MM
Input month of 1-12 with the numeric keys on the keyboard.

Input dd
Input date of 1-31 with the numeric keys on the keyboard.
b Confirm Age

Confirm numbers
The system will automatically calculate and display age according to
the
input birth date.

Modify unit
Click and select Years, Months, Weeks and Day from the
drop-down
c Confirm Gender
Click and select F, M or O from the drop-down menu.
d Input height
Input range is 0-999,Default is cm
e Input Weight
Input range is 0-999,Default is kg
f Input GRAV
Input gestational values with the numeric keys on the keyboard.
Input range is 0-99. Maximum 2 characters.
g Display of BAS
The system will automatically calculate BAS according to Height and
2

Weight. Default unit is m .


5 DGA Calculated By
Select method for calculating DGA among LMP, EDC, First DGA and Today's
DGA. For example, select LMP and display as
.
111

Chapter 9 New Patient

All calculation methods are shown as below:


Figure 9-1 Calculation methods of DGA
LMP
EDC
LMP

First DGA

Year/Month/Day

of LMP
Date

Year/Month/Day Year/Month/Date of
of EDC
first or past
examination
GA

Gestation week by
the first or past
examination
DGA
Date of
Date of
Date of examination
Calculated examination
examination
Date + GA
by
Date
+Gestation
periodDate

Todays DGA

Gestation week
by the date of
examination
GA

a Input LMPyyyy.MM.dd
Please refer to5Input Birth Dateyy/mm/dd.
b Input and display Date

When choosing methods for calculating LMP, key in the year, month
and date of LMP, the system will automatically calculate and display
the
Expected Date of Childbirth

When choosing other calculation methods, please refer to 3Birth


Date
yyyy.MM.dd for the input of date.
c Input GA
If the First DGA method is chosen, the operator could input Gestation
Week

Input w
Input the gestation week number with the numeric keys on the
keyboard,
with a range of 0-50 and maximum 2 characters.

Input d
Input the day number with the numeric keys on the keyboard, with a
range of 0-7 and maximum 1 character.
6 Display EDC, DGA
Display the calculated EDC
Display the calculated DGA.
7 Input diagnose basic information
a Input Ordering Physician

112

Chapter 9 New Patient

Please key in the name of the physician.


Maximum 30 characters
b Input Sonographer
Please key in the name of the Sonographer.
Maximum 30 characters
c Input Custom 1,Custom 2
Please input Note with the keyboard
Maximum 30 characters
d Input Description
Please input the description of diagnosis with the keyboard.
Maximum 20 rows.
8 Set Fetal Use
Check this item. After saving the patient information, the ultrasound power could be
automatically set ad Low.
9 Confirm function menu OK/Cancel
5 OK
6 Cancel
Push function menu button 5 OK to save the input information.
Push function menu button 6 Cancel to cancel the input information and quit the
new patient interface.

113

Chapter 10 Patient Data

Chapter 10 Patient Data


Press

to open the Patient Data interface as shown in the below Figure. The

interface is divided into two regions of A and B.

Figure10-1 Patient Data

114

Chapter 10 Patient Data

If the equipment is connected to a network printer, the speed of accessing the


Patient Data interface will slow down because of the need to search the network.
Region A Function: Display List (patient list), Tags (list of classified patients) and
Search (patient search). Click List,Tags,Searchrespectively on region
A to open the corresponding interface.
Region B Function: Select patient in region A first, then check patient data in
region B, which include Images, Patient Information, Report, Measurement
& Calculation. Click Images
Patient
,
Information, Report
Measurement
,
& Calculation respectively to open the corresponding interface in region B.
(1) List: List all patient IDs and names in the database (move the scroll bar in the bottom
to get more information). Refer to 10.1 List for details.
(2) Tags: Classified patient list Tags. Refer to 10.2 Tags for details. Tags enable group
management of patients, that is, to set up folders by date and move patient data to
corresponding folders (Refer to 10.1 List (5) Tags).
(3) Search: Patient search. Refer to 10.3 Search for details.
(4) Images: Access and check patient image videos to perform delete or replay of cine
videos. Refer to 10.4 Images for details.
(5) Patient Information: Set new patient or edit basic patient information. Its equivalent to
Chapter 9 New Patient. Refer to 10.5 Patient Information for details.
(6) Report: Patient report. The operator could put images into report and print it out. Refer
to 10.6 Report for details.
(7) Measurement & Calculation: Chek measurement results and measurement report.
Its equivalent to Chapter 16 Measurement Report. Refer to 10.7 Measurement &
Calculation for details.
(8) Menu button 6 Exit: Push menu button 6 to exit the Patient Data interface.

10.1 List
Press

Patient
Data

to open the Patient Data interface and click List at the bottom left.

The Patient Data interface shows as below Figure 10.1-1.

115

Chapter 10 Patient Data

Figure10.1-1 Patient Data List


1 Unfold/Hide List
Click

: Unfold the List screen rightwards to check more information.

Meantime,
Click

turns into

: Hide part of the List screen.

2 Check all/ Check none


Click

and the boxes in front of all patients on the List screen are checked.

Click

again to uncheck all boxes.

3 Delete
Click

Check the patient to be deleted from the List screen and click

to

delete all data of the patient. If no patient is selected, click Delete and the
current patient data is deleted.
4 Export
Check the patients to be saved/ exported on the List screen and click
open the below interface.

116

to

Chapter 10 Patient Data

Figure10.1-2 The Export interface


< Operation >
Plug in the storage device (such as USB driver ) Check the patient to be
saved/exported on the List page Click Export

to open the interface

Click Refreshto refresh drivers Select the target storage driver Click
Save to store Click Safe Removal to safely remove the external storage
device Click OK.
< Note >
Click Refresh, refresh drivers and show the newly connected external
storage device (such as USB driver or CD disc).
Driver list: Display local drivers, connected storage devices, etc. The list shows
the title of the storage driver, total space, space available and description of
drivers.
Space to occupy: Disk space the data to be exported would occupy.
Remaining storage space: The remaining disc space of the selected storage
device.
Click Saveto export.
Click Safe Removalto safely remove the external storage device..
Click OKto finish export and exit the interface.
Click Cancelto exit the interface directly..
5 Tag Patients : Classify patients, that is, to put patients in different folders. Click
to open the interface, as shown in the below Figure:
Tag Patients

117

Chapter 10 Patient Data

Figure 10.1-3 Tag Interface


< Operation >
Check patients to be classified into the same folder on the List screen click Tag
to open the interface select Tag or click New Tag to build a new
Patients
Tag click Add selected patient to tag click OK
< Note >
Tag list: Show the current Tag.
New Tag:ClickNew Tagto create a new Tag. An interface pops up like the
below Figure. Input a new tag name then clickOK

Figure 10.1-4 New Tag


Rename: Select the Tag to be renamed in the Tag List and click Rename
to modify the Tag name.
Delete:Select the tag to be deleted in the Tag list and clickDelete to remove
the tag.
Click Add selected patient to tagand save the selected patients into the
selected tag.
Click OK to complete export and exit the interface.
Click Cancelto directly exit the interface.

6 DICOM
118

:select the patient to be sent by DICOM and click

to send the

Chapter 10 Patient Data

selected patient data to DICOM server


7 Drivers: Click the drop-down box to select driver and the below interface shows
up. After the driver has been selected, the List interface displays the patient data
under the driver

Figure 10.1-5 Drivers


8 Patient information list on the List interface: List patient name, ID and other basic
information.
9 Scroll bar: Move the scroll bar to check more information.

10.2 Tags
Press

Patient
Data

to open the Patient Data interface, then clickTagson the bottom left to

open the screen to check the classified patient list (Tags) and quickly locate the
demanded patient among tags and check the patient details (Images, Patient
Information, Report, Measurement & Calculation), shown in below Figure 10.2-1.

Figure 10.2-1 Tags


119

Chapter 10 Patient Data

The Tags setup method is shown on the left of the above figure. Refer to 10.1 List -5
Tag Patients for details.
The Tags interface is shown on the right of the above figure. Details as below:
1 The Tags tool bar
Check the patient in tags list, then click the tool bar button to realize the
corresponding function.
Check all/ Check none

: Refer to 10.1 List - 2Check all/ Check None

for details
Delete

: Refer to 10.1 List - 3Delete

Export

: Refer to 10.1 List - 4Export

DICOM

:Refer to 10.1 List - 6DICOM

for details
for details
for details.

2 Detailed Tags List


Click each tag on the created Tags and the corresponding details of patient data
show up. As shown in the above figure, click
and two corresponding
patients show up.
.
3 Details of patient list
Display the details of patient data corresponding to the select Tags.

10.3 Search
Press

Patient
Data

to open the Patient Data interface. Then click Searchon the bottom

left to open the page. The operator can search patient data by different standards.

120

Chapter 10 Patient Data

Figure 10.3-1 The Search interface


The left of the above Figure: Search standards are ID and Name only. Click
to add new search standards (shown on the right of Figure10.3-1).
The right of the above Figure10.3-1: Search standards include ID, Name, Birthdates,
to add new search standards
Latest Patients and Access Date. Click
(shown on the right of Figure10.3-1 ).
< Operation >
Check search standard (ID, Name, Birthdates, etc.) Edit the search condition
corresponding to the search standard Click

to search

< Note >


Operation Method:
1 The Search tool bar
Check patients from the searched patient list, then click the tool bar button to
realize the corresponding function.
Check all / Check none

: Refer to 10.1 List - 2Check all / Check none

for details.
Delete

: Refer to 10.1 List - 3delete

for details.

121

Chapter 10 Patient Data

Export

: Refer to 10.1 List - 4export

Tag Patients

. For details.

:Refer to 10.1 List - 5Tag Patients

Search

: Click

DICOM

: Refer to 10.1 List - 6DICOM

for details.

to start searching.
for details.

2 ID: Check
, input search standard and search by patient ID.
, input search standard and search by patient name.
3 Name: Check
, input search standard and search by patient
4 Birthdates: Check
birthdate.
5 Latest Patients: Check
, input patient number and search the
latest patients by patient number.
6 Access Date: Check
, input search standard and search by
access
date.
7 Detailed list of searched patients.

Reminder

Single or multiple search standards can be used. In case of multiple standard


search,the search result must meet all set standards.

10.4 Images

Figure 10.4-1The Images Interface


122

Chapter 10 Patient Data

1 Image list: Searched image or video list is shown in this region.


2 Play:
is shown on the bottom left of the screen. Click
to play cine video.
3 Image zooming: In the All images View list, move the cursor onto the image to be
zoomed, wait a second, and the image is zoomed and displayed floatingly. Zoom
function is valid only when

is unchecked.

4 Images floatmenu: As below Figure10.5-1.

Full Screen
screen.
Image View

Figure10.5-1 Image Toolbar


: Click
to display the image selected from image list in full
: Click

to zoom and display the selected image, shown in

below Figure.

123

Chapter 10 Patient Data

Figure 10.4-2 Image View Interface


on the bottom left to
If a video has been selected, the operator could click
play it. Move the cursor onto the zoomed image, click Nextand the below
interface pops up.

Figure 10.4-3 Pop-up menu


Float menu: Click

124

to open the images float menu.

Chapter 10 Patient Data

Export: Click

to export image or video. Refer to 10.1 List - 4

Export

for details.
to delete image or video.

Delete: Click

All images view : Click


to show the Figure list and the selected image will
be zoomed and displayed, shown in Figure10.4-1.
Zoom

: Click

Play cinema

to choose different zoom ratios.

: If a video is selected, the

button is activated. Click

to

play video.
Delete

: If an image or video is selected, the operator can click

to delete the

image or video.
Thumbnail view

: Check

. In All images view

, move

cursor onto the image to be zoomed, wait a second, and the image is zoomed
and floatingly displayed. The zoom function is invalid if

is

unchecked.

10.5 Patient Information


Press

Patient
Data

to open the Patient Data interface. Then clickPatient Information

on the bottom left and open the screen. Select a patient on the List, Tags or Search
interface and click Edit to modify patient information. After modification, click Update
to save the modification. The modified patient information is displayed in the list on the
right. Refer to Chapter 9 New Patient for details.

10.6 Report
Press

Patient
Data

key to open the Patient Data interface. Then clickReporton the

bottom left to open it. On the List, Tags or Search interface, select one patient and
the corresponding report displays on the Report interface, shown in the below Figure:

125

Chapter 10 Patient Data

Figure 10.6-1 Report on the List Interface


< Operation>
1. Select a patient on List, Tags or Search interface Click Report 2. Edit
report (input image description , ultrasound reminder) 3. Select image into
report.

126

Chapter 10 Patient Data

< Note >


1 Patient Data in Report: Patient name, sex, age, ID and so on.
2 Edit Report:
In the [image description] edit box, input the pathological information
revealed
in the ultrasound image
In the [ultrasound reminder] edit box, input the diagnostic conclusion
according to the pathological information of the ultrasound image.
3 Select Image: Put the patient ultrasound image into the report and print it out.
< Operation >
Select Image: Select the needed image in downsized image at the bottom
of the report edit interface.
Select Image into Report: Select downsized image, then click the image
storage box above.
Remove Image From Report: Click Image storage box or the multiple
choice box below.
4 PrintPush menu button 3 Print to preview and print report.

10.7 Measurement & Calculation


Press

Patient
Data

to open the Patient Data interface. Then click Measurement &

Calculationon the bottom-left to open it. Select a patient on the List, Tags, or
Search interface and the corresponding measurement and calculation results are
displayed on the Measurement & Calculation interface.
Refer to Chapter 16 Measurement and Calculation Report for details (No printing
function on this interface).

127

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement


11.1 Basic Measurement Method
11.1.1 Instruction on relevant measurement buttons
1 Trackball: To move the cursor to change measurement tracks

2 Set: To set the starting and ending points of measurement tracks

3 Next : Press Next to cancel the tracks and values of the current
measurement. Press Next continuously to cancel previous measurement
tracks and values one by one.

4 Menu buttons: Push menu buttons to realize corresponding functions.

5 Clear All: Cancel all measurement values, tracks and marks and exit the
current measurement mode.

6 Distance: Start Dist measurement mode

7 Area: Start Area measurement mode

8 Calc: Start Obstetric Measurement, Gynecologic Measurement, Cardiac


Measurement, Urology and Others Measurement under all application modes.
128

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

Refer to 8.7.3 Edit Data - Measurement for the corresponding setting.

Star Gynecologic application by Func + 9 (Func combination key), and


start Gynecologic Measurement by press Calc in freeze B mode or
freeze B/B mode.
Star Obstetric application by Func + 0 (Func combination key), and start
Obstetric Measurement by press Calc in freeze B mode or freeze B/B
mode.
Star Cardiac application by Func + - (Func combination key), and start
Cardiac Measurement by press Calc in freeze B mode , freeze B/B
mode, freeze B/M mode, or freeze M mode
9 Ins: Urology and Others Measurement .

Start Urology and Others Measurement by press Ins in freeze B mode


or freeze B/B mode.

11.1.2 Measure Distance


<Function>
Measure the distance between two points
<Operation>
1. Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one
end of the line, press Set to fix the
point.Measured value showed as 0.0mm.

2.

Roll the trackball to move the cursor to the


other end of the line (measured value
showed in real-time).

3.

Press Set to fix the ending point and


finish this measurement. In the meantime,
the cursor turns into x and enters the
second measurement.

+ 87.8 mm

+ 87.8 mm
Set

129

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

11.1.3 Measure Angle


<Function>
Measure angles, with value range of 0180.
<Operation>
1. Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one point on
one side of the angle, press Set to fix the point
(angle 90 showed.
+ x.xx

2.

Move the cursor to the vertex of the angle.

3.

PressSetto set the vertex of the angle.

4.

Move the cursor to one point on the other side of


the angleangle degree showed in real time
press Enter to fix the point.

5.

Press Enter to fix the point and the angle is set


(After this measurement, the cursor turns into x
and enters the second measurement).

+ 40.00

11.1.4 Measure Trace


<Function>
The operator moves the cursor along the edge of the
measured region and draws its outline. The system
then calculates the circumference and area of the
measured region.
<Operation>
1.

130

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one point on


the edge of the measured area, pressSetto fix
the starting point (circumference 0.00cm and
area 0.00cm2 showed.

+ 87.8 mm
4.66 cm 2

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

2.

Move the cursor along the edge of the measured area and draw its outline
measured value displayed in real time.

3.

PressSet to close the curve and finish this


measurement the cursor turns into x and enters
the second measurement.

11.1.5 Measure Ellipse


<Function>
If the measure area looks close to an eclipse, such as in measuring the fetus head
circumference, the operator could use eclipse measurement to get the circumference
and area of the eclipse.
<Calculation formula>
DS Long-axis of eclipse
DL Short-axis of eclipse
C
Circumference of eclipse
A Area of eclipse

<Operation>
1. Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one endpoint
on the long axis (or short axis) of the eclipse, press
Setto fix the point circumference 0.0mm and
area 0.00cm2 showed.
2.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to the other


endpoint of the long (or short) axis of the eclipse.

3.

PressSetto fix the point (the cursor automatically


moves to the midpoint on this axis)

131

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

4.

Roll the trackball, adjust the length of the short (or


long) axis.

5.

To readjust the position of the starting or the ending


point, pressNextto switch back to the adjustment
function.

6.

Now, roll the trackball to adjust the position of


srating or the ending-point.

7.

Press Set to set the shape of the eclipse and finish


this measurement. The cursor turns into x and
enters the second measurement.

11.1.6 Measure Volume


a VolumeArea-Length method
<Calculation formula>
Measure areaTand long axiaL. Calculate the approximate volumeV based
on the measurement results.

V 8T 2 / 3 L
Figure 11.1.6 Volume MeasurementArea-Length
<Operation >
132

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

1.

Use the trackball and Setto track the area of the


measured object. Please refer to 11.1.4 Trace
Measurement Method.

After tracking, display the cursor mark in the


starting point of the tracking.

2.

Measuring the long axis of the track. Display


the measurement result and finish this measurement.

b VolumeEllipse method
This method is the same as the Area-Length method, which calculates the
approximate volumeV based on area and long axis. The difference is that area is
measured in an ellipse.
Please refer to 11.1.5 Measure Ellipse to perform volume measurement.

c VolumeBi-plane method
<Calculation formula>
Measure three inter-perpendicular diameters of D1, D2, D3 of the measured object
and calculate volume, as shown in the below Figure. It is a more accurate method
than the Area-Length method and the Ellipse method.

D1

D2

D3

V
Figure 11.1.6

D1 D 2 D3

Measure VolumeBi-plane method

<Operation>
1. Use the trackball and Set to measure D1, D2, D3 (Distance) respectively.
Please refer to 11.1.2 Measure Distance.
133

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

Measuring D2

The operator could defreeze the image or get a new


image in the measuring process.
D1

11.1.7 Display measurement result


Eight measurements could be displayed in maximum. The cursors are as below for these
eight measurement.

11.1.8 Cancel measurement


1 Next
<Function>
Cancel measurement tracks and measurement results.
<Operation>
In the course of measuring, pressNextto cancel the tracks and results of the
current measurement. Press Nextcontinuously to cancel previous measurement
tracks and results one by one.

Figure 11.1.8-1 Undo

2 Clear All
<Function>
Clear all measurement tracks and measurement results.
<Operation>
PressClear All

Figure 11.1.8-2 Clear All

134

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

If the operator selects


in System
Preset General, all measurement tracks and measurement results
are cleared after defreeze. Refer to 8.2 General.

11.2 Measure Distance in B mode and B/B mode


B mode and B/B mode share the same operation for Distance measurement, which
could be activated in both freeze and defreeze states.
PressDistancein the main screen of B mode and B/B mode to enter Distance
measurement.

11.2.1 Distance Measurement Menu in B Mode and B/B Mode


On the main screen of B and B/B modes, Distance Measurement menu is as below:
Page
1 Ratio N
2 Ratio D
6 Other Measurement
Page
Push Menu Button 4
Push Menu Button 6
1 Distance

2 Angle

4 Ratio [Distance]
Push Menu Button 5

Page
1 Stenosis A

2 Stenosis B

5 Stenosis [Distance]
Push Menu Button 6
6 Other Measurement

Page
1 Distance 2 Angle
4 Ratio [Distance]
5 Stenosis [Distance]
Push menu button 1: Enter Distance measurement
Push menu button 2: Enter Angle measurement
Push menu button 4: Enter Ratio measurement. New menu pops up (Menu page
-)
Push menu button 5: Enter Stenosis measurement. New menu pops up (menu
page -)
Page -
1 Ratio N
2 Ratio D
6 Other Measurement
Push menu button 1: Enter Ratio N measurement
Push menu button 2: Enter Ratio D measurement
Push menu button 6: Enter other measurements
Page -
1 Stenosis A
2 Stenosis B
6 Other Measurement
Push menu button 1: Enter Stenosis A measurement
Push menu button 2: Enter Stenosis B measurement
Push menu button 6: Enter other measurements
135

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

11.2.2 Distance
<Function>
Measure the distance between two points.
<Operation>
On the main screen of B mode and B/B mode, press Distanceto enter distance
measurement, with Distance Measurement shown on the bottom left. Menu as
below:
1 Distance
2 Angle
4 Ratio [Distance]
5 Stenosis [Distance]
Please refer to 11.1.2 Distance measurement for measurement method.

11.2.3 Angle
<Function>
Measure angles, with value range of 0180.
<Operation>
On the main screen of B and B/B modes, press Distanceto enter Distance
measurement, with Distance Measurement displayed on the bottom left. Menu as
below:
1 Distance
2 Angle
4 Ratio [Distance]
5 Stenosis [Distance]
Now push menu button 2 to enter Angle measurement, with Angle Measurement
shown on the bottom left. Please refer to 11.1.3 Angle measurement method for
measurement method.

11.2.4 RatioDistance
<Function>
Measure two distances and calculate their ratio.
<Calculation formula>

N
Ratio Dist = N/D
D
<Operation>
On the main screen of B and B/B modes, pressDistanceto enter Distance
measurement, with Distance Measurement shown on the bottom left. Menu as
below:
1 Distance
2 Angle
4 Ratio [Distance] 5 Stenosis [Distance]
Now push menu button 4. Another menu pops up to enter Ratio Distance
measurement.
1 Ratio N
2 Ratio D
6 Other Measurement
136

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

1.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one endpoint of


line 1 and press Setto fix the point.

+ 0.0 mm

Set

2.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to the other


endpoint of line 1. Press Setto fix the other
endpoint of line 1 and finish the measurement of line
1. The cursor turns into x.

3.

Push menu button 2 and enters measurement of line


2.
Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one endpoint of
line 2. PressSetto fix the point.

4.

5.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to the other


endpoint of line2.

Ratio Dist
>N
D
N/D

+ 8.78 cm
x 10.00cm

Ratio Dist
N 8.78
>D 10.00
N/D 87.80%

6.

Press Setto fix the other endpoint of line 2. The


system will display on the buttom left the measured
value of the two lines and the ratio of the length of
the two lines.

137

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

1. The operator could push menu button 1 Ration N if the length of


line 1 needs to be measured again. Then follow the <Operation>.
2. The operator could push menu button 2 Ration D if the length of
line 2 eeds to be measured again. Then follow the <Operation>

11.2.5 StenosisDistance
<Function>
Measure two distances and calculate their stenosis.
<Calculation formula>

<Operation>
On the main screen of B and B/B modes, press Distanceto enter distance
measurement, with Distance Measurement shown on the bottom left of the screen.
Menu as below:
1 Distance 2 Angle
4 Ratio [Distance] 5 Stenosis [Distance]
Now push menu button 5 and the Stenosis (Distance) measurement menu pops up.
1 Stenosis A 2 Stenosis B
6 Other Measurement

138

1.

Roll the trackball to move the cursor to the first


endpoint of line 1. Press Setto fix the point.

2.

Roll the trackball to move the cursor to the


other endpoint of line 1. and finish the
measurement of line 1. The cursor turns into
x.

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

3.

Push menu button 2 and enters measurement of line 2.

4.

Roll the trackball to move the cursor to the first


endpoint of line 2. Press Setto fix the point

+ 8.78 cm
x 0.00cm

Set

5.

Roll the trackball to move the cursor to the other


endpoint of line 2.

6.

Press Setto fix the other endpoint of line


2. On the bottom left corner, the system
displays the measured value of two lines as
well as the stenosis of line 1 to line 2.

1. If the length of line 1


push menu button 1
<Operation>.
2. If the length of line 2
push menu button 2
<Operation>.

Steno Dist
A 8.78
>B
1-B/A

is to be measured again, the operator could


Steno A, then follow the procedure in
is to be measured again, the operator could
Steno B, then follow the procedure in

11.3 Measure Distance in B/M Mode and M Mode


The B/M mode and M mode share the same operation of Distance measurement,
which is used only in freeze state.
On the main screen of B/M mode and M mode, press Freezeto freeze image, then
pressDistanceto enter Distance measurement, as in below Figure.

139

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

11.3.1 Distance measurement menu in B/M, M mode


On the main screen of B/M an M modes, Distance measurement menu is as below:
Page
1 Heart Rate
2 Time
3 Slope
4 Distance
5 Ratio
Page
Push Menu Button 5

Push Menu Button 6

1 Ratio N
2 Ratio D
6 Other Measurement
Page
1 Heart Rate 2 Time
3 Slope
4 Distance
5 Ratio
Push menu button 1: Enter Heart Rate measurement
Push menu button 2: Enter Time measurement
Push menu button 3: Enter Slope measurement
Push menu button 4: Enter Distance measurement
Push menu button 5: Enter Ratio measurement. A new menu pops upPage .

Page -
1 Ratio N
2 Ratio D
6 Other Measurement
Push menu button 1: Enter Ratio N measurement
Push menu button 2: Enter Ration D measurement
Push menu button 6: Enter other measurements.

11.3.2 Heart Rate


<Function>
Measure heart rate.
<Operation>
On the main screen of B and B/B modes, press Distanceto enter Distance
measurement, with Distance Measurement shown on the bottom left corner. Menu as
below:
1 Heart Rate 2 Time
3 Slope
4 Distance
5 Ratio
Push menu button 1 to enter Heart Rate measurement.

140

1.

Roll the trackball to move the cursor to


one peak (valley) of the heart rate curve.

2.

Press Setto fix the starting point.

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

3.

Roll the trackball to move the cursor to the


peak (valley) neighboring the starting point.

4.

Press Setto fix the ending point.

+ H.Rate:
72 bpm

Set

+ H.Rate:
72 bpm

11.3.3 Time
<Function>
Measure time.
<Operation>
On the main screen of B and B/B modes, press Distanceto enter Distance
measurement, with Distance Measurement shown on the bottom left corner. Menu as
below:
1 Heart Rate 2 Time
3 Slope
4 Distance
5 Ratio
Push menu button 2 to enter Time
measurement.

1.

Roll the trackball to move the cursor to


one peak (valley) of the heart rate curve.

2.

PressSetto fix the starting point.

141

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

3.

Roll the trackball to move the cursor to


the neighboring peak (valley) of the
heart rate curve.

4.

PressSetto fix the ending point.

11.3.4 Slope
<Function>
Measure slope.
<Operation>
On the main screen of B and B/B modes, press Distanceto enter Distance
measurement, with Distance Measurement shown on the bottom left corner. Menu as
below:
1 Heart Rate 2 Time
3 Slope
4 Distance
5 Ratio
Push menu button 3 to enter Slope measurement.

142

1.

Roll the trackball to move the cursor


to the starting point of the
measurement target.

2.

Press Setto fix the starting point.

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

3.

Move the cursor to the ending point of


the measurement target.

4.

PressSetto fix the ending point.

11.3.5 Distance
<Function>
Measure the distance between two points.
<Operation>
On the main screen of B and B/B modes, pressDistanceto enter Distance
measurement, with Distance Measurement shown on the bottom left corner. Menu as
below:
1 Heart Rate 2 Time
3 Slope
4 Distance
5 Ratio
Push menu button 4 to enter Distance measurement.
Please refer to 11.1.2 Distance measurement method for details.

11.3.6 RatioDistance
<Function>
Measure two distances and calculate their Ratio.
<Calculation formula>

<Operation>
On the main screen of B and B/B modes, press Distanceto enter Distance
measurement, with Distance Measurement shown on the bottom left corner. Menu as
below:
1 Heart Rate 2 Time
3 Slope
4 Distance
5 Ratio
Push menu button 5. Another menu pops up. Enter RatioDistance measurement.
143

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

1 Ratio N
2 Ratio D
Please refer to 11.2.5 RatioDistance.

6 Other Measurement

11.4 Measure Area in B and B/B modes


B mode and B/B mode share the same Area measurement items and operations.
Area measurement is available only in B mode B/B mode. Press Areain the main
screen of B mode and B/B mode to enter Area measurement, as the below Figure:

11.4.1 Distance measurement menu in B mode and B/B mode


On the main screen of B mode and B/B mode, Area measurement menu relationship is
as below:
Page -
1 Ratio[TraceArea] 2 Ratio[EllipseArea] 3 Stenosis[TraceArea] 4 Stenosis[EllipseArea] 5 By Area 6Return

Page
1 Trace

Push Menu Button 5


2 Ellipse

Page -

3 Volume[Trace]

4 Volume[Ellipse]

Push Menu Button 5

Push Menu Button 6


5 Volume[Bi-Plane]

6 Next

Push Menu Button 6

1 Ratio[TraceGirth] 2 Ratio[EllipseGirth] 3 Stenosis[TraceGirth] 4 Stenosis[EllipseGirth] 5 ByGirth

6 Return

Note: Menu button 5 is used for switching between Calculate Ratio and Stenosis by area
and Calculate Ratio and Stenosis by circumference.

Page
1 Trace
2 Ellipse 3 Volume[Trace]
4 Volume[Ellipse]
5 Volume[Bi-Plane]
6 Next
Push menu button 1: Enter Trace measurement
Push menu button 2: Enter Ellipse measurement
Push menu button 3: enter Volume[Trace] measurement
Push menu button 4: Enter Volume[Ellipse] measurement
Push menu button 5: Enter Volume[Bi-Plane] measurement
Push menu button 6: Enter the next menu
Page -
1 Ratio[TraceArea] 2 Ratio[EllipseArea] 3 Stenosis[TraceArea] 4 Stenosis[EllipseArea] 5 By Area

144

Push menu button 1: Enter Ratio[TraceArea] measurement


Push menu button 2: Enter Ration[EllipseArea] measurement
Push menu button 3: Enter Stenosis [TraceArea] measurement
Push menu button 4: Enter Stenosis[EllipseArea] measurement

6 Return

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

Push menu button 5: The basis of Ratio and Stenosis turns into Area while the
menu turns into the page - menu.
Push menu button 6: Return to the the previous menu.
Page-
1 Ratio[TraceGirth] 2 Ratio[EllipseGirth] 3 Stenosis[TraceGirth] 4 Stenosis[EllipseGirth] 5 ByGirth

6 Return

Push menu button 1: Enter Ratio[TraceGirth] measurement


Push menu button 2: Enter Ration[EllipseGirth] measurement
Push menu button 3: Enter Stenosis [TraceGirth] measurement
Push menu button 4: Enter Stenosis[EllipseGirth] measurement
Push menu button 5: The basis of Ratio and Stenosis turns into Girth while the
menu button turns into Page - menu.
Push menu button 6: Return to the previous menu.

11.4.2 Trace
<Function>
A curve is formed along the moving tracks of the cursor. Move the cursor along the
edge of the measured area to form a curve and the system will calculate the
circumference and area of the measured region.
<Operation>
On the main screen of B and B/B modes, press Areato enter Area measurement.
Menu as below:
1 Trace
2 Ellipse 3 Volume[Trace]
4 Volume[Ellipse]
5 Volume[Bi-Plane]
6 Next
Push menu button 1 to enter Trace measurement.
Please refer to 11.1.4 Trace measurement.

11.4.3 Ellipse
<Function>
If the measured area looks close to an ellipse, such as measuring fetus head
circumference in obstetrics measurement, the operator could use ellipse
measurement.
<Operation>
On the main screen of B and B/B modes, Press Areato enter Area measurement.
Menu as below:
1 Trace
2 Ellipse 3 Volume[Trace]
4 Volume[Ellipse]
5 Volume[Bi-Plane]
6 Next
Push menu button 2 to enter Ellipse measurement.
Please refer to 11.1.5 Ellipse Measurement for measurement methods.

145

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

11.4.4 Measure Volume


Measure volume on B mode images.
The operator could preset one of the three methods in the measurement menu:
Method

Symbol Description

Area-Length L
Method
T

Ellipse
Method

Bi-plane
Method

Unit

Measure area and long axis (rotaitng mm


axis) through tracking
2

cm

mL

Measure area and long axis (rotating mm


axis) by ellipse approximation.

mL

D1
D2
D3
V

Measure three diameters of images mm


on two interperpendicular sections.

Measurement
Remark
method
Volume
Area-Length

Volume Ellipse
Method

Volume
(Bi-plane
Method

mL

Refer to 11.1.6 Measure Volume for operation.

11.4.5 Ratio[TraceArea]
<Function>
Measure the area and circumference of two regions and calculate the ratio of their
areas.
<Calculation Formula>

146

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

<Operation>
On the main screen of B mode and B/B mode, press Areato enter Area
measurement. Menu as below:
1 Trace
2 Ellipse 3 Volume[Trace]
4 Volume[Ellipse]
5 Volume[Bi-Plane]
6 Next
Push menu button 6 to enter the next menu.
1 Ratio[TraceArea] 2 Ratio[EllipseArea] 3 Stenosis[TraceArea] 4 Stenosis[EllipseArea] 5 By Area

6 Return

Push menu button 1. The next menu pops up and enters Ratio[TraceArea]
measurement.
1 Ratio N
2 Ratio D
6 Other Measurement
1.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one


point on the edge of the first measured
region, press Setto fix the starting point
(circumference 0.0mm and area 0.00cm2
shown) .

+ 0. 0 mm
0.00 cm 2

Set

2.

Move the cursor along the edge of the


measured region to draw the outline of the
regionmeasured value shown in real time.

+ 87.8 mm
4.66 cm2

Set

3.

Press Set to close the curve (This


measurement is completed. The cursor turns
into
x
and
enters
the
second
measurement).

Ratio Area
>N
D
N/D

Ratio Area-T
>N 4.66
D
N/D

+ 87.8 mm
4.66 cm 2
Set

x 0.0 mm
0.00 cm 2
Ratio Area
N 4.66
>D
N/D

147

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

4.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one


point on the edge of the second measured
region, press Setto fix the starting point
circumference 0.00cm and area 0.00cm2
shown.

5.

Move the cursor along the edge of the


measured area to draw the outline of the
measured regionmeasured value shown in
real time.

6.

PressSetto close the curve. Measurement of


the area and circumference of the two regions
is completed and the system automatically
calculates the ratio of the two areas.

+ 87.8 mm
4.66 cm 2
Set

x 153.3 mm
16.24 cm2
Ratio Area
>N 4.66
D 16.24
N/D 28.69%

11.4.6 Ratio[TraceGirth]
<Function>
Measure the area and circumference of two regions and calculate the ratio of two
circumferences.
<Calculation Formula>

N
NGirth
DGirth
Ratio Girth-T = N/D
D
<Operation>
On the main screen of B mode and B/B mode, press Girthto enter Girth
measurement. Menu as below:
1 Trace

2 Ellipse

3 Volume[Trace]

4 Volume[Ellipse]

Push menu button 6 to enter the next menu.


148

5 Volume[Bi-Plane]

6 Next

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

1 Ratio[TraceGirth] 2 Ratio[EllipseGirth] 3 Stenosis[TraceGirth] 4 Stenosis[EllipseGirth] 5 ByGirth

6 Return

Push menu button 1. The next menu pops up and enters Ratio[TraceGirth]
measurement.
1 Ratio N
2 Ratio D
6 Other Measurement

1.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one


point on the edge of the first measured
region, press Setfor fix the starting point.
(circumference 0.00cm and area 0.00cm2
shown).

2.

Move the cursor along the edge of the


measured region to draw the outline of the
regionmeasured value shown in real time.
Press Set to close the curve (This
measurement is completed. The cursor turns
into x.

3.

Push menu button 2, and enters D measurement.

4.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one


point on the edge of the second measured
region, press Setto fix the starting point
circumference 0.0mm and area 0.00cm2
shown.

+ 87.8 mm
4.66 cm 2
x 0.0 mm
0.00 cm 2

Set

5.

Ratio Girth-T
N 8.78
>D
N/D

Move the cursor along the edge of the


measured region to draw the outline of the
region measured value shown in real
time

149

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

6.

PressSetto close the curve. Measurement


of the area and circumference of the two
regions is completed and the system
automatically calculates the ratio of the two
circumferences

11.4.7 Ratio[EllipseArea]
<Function>
Measure the area and circumference of two regions and calculate the ratio of the two
areas.
<Calculation Formula>

<Operation>
On the main screen of B mode and B/B mode, press Areato enter Area
measurement. Menu as below:
1 Trace

2 Ellipse

3 Volume[Trace]

4 Volume[Ellipse]

5 Volume[Bi-Plane]

6 Next

Push menu button 6 to enter the next menu.


1Ratio[TraceArea] 2 Ratio[EllipseArea] 3 Stenosis[TraceArea] 4 Stenosis[EllipseArea] 5 By Area

6 Return

Push menu button 2. The next menu pops up and enters Ratio[EllipseArea]
measurement.
1 Stenosis A
2 Stenosis B
6 Return

150

1.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one


endpoint of the long (or short) axis of the first
ellipse , press Set to fix the starting point
(circumference 0.00cm and area 0.00cm2
shown).

2.

Move the cursor to another endpoint of the


long (or short) axis of the first ellipse. Press
Set to fix the endpoint (Now the cursor
automatically moves to the endpoint of
another axis).

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

3.

Roll the trackball, adjust the length of the


long (or short) axis. Press Setto fix the
shape of the ellipse, and complete this
measurement. (This measurement is
completed. The cursor turns into x and
enters the measurement of the second
ellipse).

4.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one


endpoint of the long (or short) axis of the
second ellipse , press Set to fix the
starting point (circumference 0.00cm and
area 0.00cm2 show n).

5.

Move the cursor to another endpoint of the long (or short) axis of the second
ellipse. Press Setto fix the endpoint (Now the cursor automatically moves to the
endpoint of another axis).

6.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one


endpoint of the long (or short) axis of the
second ellipse. Now the measurement of the
area and circumference of the two ellipses is
completed and the system automatically
measures the ratio of the two areas.

11.4.8 Ratio[EllipseGirth]
<Function>
Measure the area and circumference of two regions and calculate the ratio of the two
circumferences.
<Calculation formula>

151

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

<Operation>
On the main screen of the B mode and B/B mode, press Girthto enter Girth
measurement. Menu as blow:
1 Trace

2 Ellipse

3 Volume[Trace]

4 Volume[Ellipse]

5 Volume[Bi-Plane]

6 Next

Push menu button 6 to enter the next menu.


1 Ratio[TraceGirth] 2 Ratio[EllipseGirth] 3 Stenosis[TraceGirth] 4 Stenosis[EllipseGirth] 5 ByGirth

6 Return

Push menu button 2. The next menu pops up and enters Ratio[EllipseGirth]
measurement.
1 Stenosis A
2 Stenosis B
6 Return
1.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one


endpoint of the long (or short) axis of the first
ellipse , press Set to fix the starting point
(circumference 0.00cm and area 0.00cm2
shown).

2.

Move the cursor to another endpoint of the long


(or short) axis of the first ellipse. Press Set
to fix the endpoint (Now the cursor
automatically moves to the endpoint of another
axis).

3.

Roll the trackball, adjust the length of the long


(or short) axis. Press Setto fix the shape of
the ellipse, and complete this measurement.
(This measurement is completed. The cursor
turns into x and enters the measurement of
the second ellipse).

4.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one


endpoint of the long (or short) axis of the
second ellipse , press Set to fix the starting
point (circumference 0.00cm and area 0.00cm2
show n).

152

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

5.

Move the cursor to another endpoint of the long


(or short) axis of the second ellipse. Press
Setto fix the endpoint (Now the cursor
automatically moves to the endpoint of another
axis).

6.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one


endpoint of the long (or short) axis of the
second ellipse. Now the measurement of the
area and circumference of the two ellipses is
completed and the system automatically
measures the ratio of the two circumferences.

11.4.9 Stenosis (TraceArea)


<Function>
Measure the area and circumference of two regions and calculate the stenosis of the
two areas.
<Calculation Formula>
+ 50.8 mm
1.86 cm 2
x 62.3 mm
2.62 cm 2

A
AArea
BArea
STENO Area-T = |1-B/A|
B

Enter

Ratio Area-E
2
N: 1.86 cm
2
>D: 2.62cm
N/D: 31.2%

<Operation>
On the main screen of B mode and B/B mode, press Areato enter Area
measurement. Menu as below:
1 Trace
2 Ellipse
3 Volume[Trace]
4 Volume[Ellipse]
5 Volume[Bi-Plane]
6 Next
Push menu button 6 to enter the next menu.
1Ratio[TraceArea]
2 Stenosis[TraceArea]
3 Stenosis[EllipseArea]
5 By Area
6Return
Push menu button 2. The next menu pops up and enters Stenosis[TraceArea]
measurement.
1 Stenosis A
2 Stenosis B
6 Other Measurement

153

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

1.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one


point on the edge of the first measured region,
press Set to fix the starting point
(circumference 0.00cm and area 0.00cm2
shown).

2.

Move the cursor along the edge of the


measured region to draw the outline of the
regionmeasured value shown in real time.
Press Set to close the curve (This
measurement is completed. The cursor turns
into x..
and

enters

STENO Area-T
>A 4.66
B
1-B/A

3.

Push menu button


measurement.

4.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one point


on the edge of the second measured region,
press Set to fix the starting point
circumference 0.00cm and area 0.00cm2
shown.

5.

Move the cursor along the edge of the measured region to draw the outline of the
regionmeasured value shown in real time.

6.

PressSetto close the curve. Measurement of the area and circumference of the
two regions is completed and the system automatically calculates the ratio of the two
areas.

154

2,

+ 87.8 mm
4.66 cm2

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

11.4.10 Stenosis (TraceGirth)


<Function>
Measure the area and circumference of two regions and calculate the stenosis of the
two circumferences.
<Calculation Formula>

A
AGirth
BGirth
STENO Girth-T = |1-B/A|
B
<Operation>
On the main screen of B mode and B/B mode, press Girthto enter Girth
measurement. Menu as below:
1 Trace
2 Ellipse
3 Volume[Trace]
4 Volume[Ellipse]
5 Volume[Bi-Plane]
6 Next
Push menu button 6 to enter the next menu.
1Ratio[TraceGirth]
2 Stenosis[TraceGirth]
3 Stenosis[EllipseGirth]
5 ByGirth
6 Return
Push menu button 3. The next menu pops up and enters Stenosis[TraceGirth]
measurement.
1 Stenosis
2 Stenosis B
6 Other Measurement

1.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one


point on the edge of the first measured region,
press Set for fix the starting point
(circumference 0.00cm and area 0.00cm2
shown).

2.

Move the cursor along the edge of the


measured region to draw the outline of the
regionmeasured value shown in real time.
Press Set to close the curve (This
measurement is completed). The cursor turns
into x

155

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

3.

Enter the second measurement.

4.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one point


on the edge of the second measured region,
press Set to fix the starting point
circumference 0.00cm and area 0.00cm2
shown.

5.

Move the cursor along the edge of the


measured region to draw the outline of the
regionmeasured value shown in real time.

6.

PressSetto close the curve. Measurement of the area and circumference of the
two regions is completed and the system automatically calculates the ratio of the two
circumferences.

11.4.11 Stenosis [EllipseArea]


<Function>
Measure the area and circumference of two regions and calculate the stenosis of the
two areas.
<Calculation Formula>

<Operation>
On the main screen of B mode and B/B mode, press Areato enter Area
measurement. Menu as below:
1 Trace
2 Ellipse
3 Volume[Trace]
4 Volume[Ellipse]
5 Volume[Bi-Plane]
6 Next
Push menu button 6 to enter the next menu.
1 Ratio[TraceArea]
2 Stenosis[TraceArea]
3 Stenosis[EllipseArea
] 5 By Area
6 Return
Push menu button 4. The next menu pops up and enters Stenosis[EllipseArea]
measurement.
156

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

1 Stenosis A

2 Stenosis B

6 Other Measurement

1.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one


endpoint of the long (or short) axis of the first
ellipse , press Set to fix the starting point
(circumference 0.00cm and area 0.00cm2
shown).

2.

Move the cursor to another endpoint of the


long (or short) axis of the first ellipse. Press
Setto fix the endpoint (Now the cursor
automatically moves to the midpoint of this
axis).

3.

Roll the trackball, adjust the length of the


long (or short) axis. Press Setto fix the
shape of the ellipse, and complete this
measurement. (This measurement is
completed. The cursor turns into x

+ 5.08 cm
1.86 cm

Set

4.

Push menu button 2, and enters


measurement of the second ellipse..

the

5.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one


endpoint of the long (or short) axis of the
second ellipse , press Set to fix the starting
point (circumference 0.00cm and area 0.00cm2
shown)

STENO Girth-T
A 5.08
B
1-B/A

157

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

6.

Move the cursor to another endpoint of the long


(or short) axis of the second ellipse. Press
Setto fix the endpoint (Now the cursor
automatically moves to the midpoint of this
axis).

7.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one


endpoint of the long (or short) axis of the
second ellipse. Now the measurement of the
area and circumference of the two ellipses is
completed and the system automatically
measures the stenosis of the two areas.

11.4.12 Stenosis [EllipseGirth]


<Function>
Measure the area and circumference of two regions and calculate the stenosis of the
two circumferences.
<Calculation Formula>

AGirth
BGirth
STENO Girth-T = |1-B/A|

<Operation>
On the main screen of B mode and B/B mode, press Girthto enter Girth
measurement. Menu as below:
1 Trace
2 Ellipse
3 Volume[Trace]
4 Volume[Ellipse]
5 Volume[Bi-Plane]
6 Next
Push menu button 6 to enter the next menu.
1Ratio[TraceGirth]
2 Stenosis[TraceGirth]
3 Stenosis[EllipseGirth]
5ByGirth
6 Return
Push menu button 4. The next menu pops up and enters Stenosis[EllipseGirth]
measurement.
1 Stenosis A
2 Stenosis B
6 Other Measurement

158

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

1.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one endpoint of


the long (or short) axis of the first ellipse , press Set
to fix the starting point (circumference 0.00cm and area
0.00cm2 shown).

+ 0.00 cm
0.00 cm 2

Set

2.

Move the cursor to another endpoint of the long (or


short) axis of the first ellipse. Press Setto fix the
endpoint (Now the cursor automatically moves to the
midpoint of this axis).

3.

Roll the trackball, adjust the length of the long (or short)
axis. Press Setto fix the shape of the ellipse, and
complete this measurement. (This measurement is
completed. The cursor turns into x

4.

Push menu button 2, and enters the measurement of


the second ellipse.

5.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one endpoint of


the long (or short) axis of the second ellipse , press
Set to fix the starting point (circumference 0.00cm
and area 0.00cm2 shown)

+ 5.08 cm
1.86 cm 2
x 0.00 cm
0.00 cm 2

Set

6.

STENO Area-T
A
B
1-B/A

Move the cursor to another endpoint of the long (or


short) axis of the second ellipse. Press Setto fix the
endpoint (Now the cursor automatically moves to the
midpoint of this axis).

STENO Area-T
A 1.86
B
1-B/A

+ 5.08 cm
1.86 cm 2
x 8.67 cm
5.98 cm 2

Set

STENO Area-T
A 4.66
B 5.98
1-B/A 221.51%

159

Chapter 11 Basic Measurement

7.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to one endpoint of


the long (or short) axis of the second ellipse. Now the
measurement of the girth and circumference of the two
ellipses is completed and the system automatically
measures the stenosis of the two areas.

160

Chapter 12 Gynecology Measurement

Chapter 12 Gynecology Measurement


12.1 Brief Introduction to Gynecology Measurement
Gynecology measurement is available in B mode and B/B mode only.
Measurement menu and items are the same in B mode and B/B mode.
Please refer to 11.1.1 Instructions on Measurement-related Buttons for gynecology
measurement related buttons.
Please refer to 11.1.8 Cancellation of Measurement for cancellation of measurement.
Results of gynecology measurement are automatically saved onto the gynecology
measurement report. Press Report to enter the Report interface and check the
report. Please refer to 16.2 Gynecology Measurement Report for details.
in System Preset
Check
General and all measurement tracks and values are cleared after
defreeze. Please refer to 8.2 General for details.

12.1.1 Introduction to Gynecology Measurement Functions


1. Various Measurement Functions
Measure the length, width and height of uterus and calculate the volume of
uterus.
Measure the length, width and height of cervix and calculate the volume of
cervix.
Measure the thickness of endometrium.
Measure the length, width and height of ovary and calculate the volume of ovary.
Measure the diameter of follicle and calculate the volume of follicle.
2. Report function
Capable of displaying all measured and calculated values in the format of report.

161

Chapter 12 Gynecology Measurement

12.1.2 Operation Procedure of Gynecology Measurement

Create New Patient File

Select View mode

Activate Gynecology
Application

Perform ultrasound
scanning and obtain
corresponding images

1 PressNew Patientto open the New


Patient interface, enter the patient info and
save. Refer to Chapter 9 New Patient

2Select view mode from B or B/B.

3IfFucnis not activated, press the button to


activate it. Then pressGynecologic to load
gynecological measurement parameters,
with Gynecologic shown on the upper right
of the screen.

4 Perform ultrasound scanning on patient.


Adjust image parameters with menu
buttons.

Freeze image to conduct


gynecological measurement

5Freeze image after obtaining enough image


info. Select the images to be measured with
the trackball. Then pressCalcto enter
gynecology measurement.

Review
report

6PressReportto open the Report interface


and review the gynecology report. Refer to
16.2 Gynecology Report.

the

Reminder

gynecology

Only when Preset Application setting Gynecology Edit data


Measerment Region is set as Gynecologic can the operator enter
Gynecology measurement through gynecologic application, freeze
and Calc.

12.1.3 Menu Details of Gynecology Measurement


Gynecological measurement operations are the same in B mode and B/B mode. The
below menu operation is based on B mode only.
After gynecology measurement in B mode is activated, the below interface shows up:

162

Chapter 12 Gynecology Measurement

Figure 12.1.3-1 Gynecology Measurement in B Mode


1Menu
As shown in the left of Figure 12.1..3-1, the system provides gynecology
measurement menu, which read Uterus, Cervix, Endometrium, Left Ovary,
Right Ovary, L-Follicle, R-Follicle respectively. Push menu button 1 to select
the desired measurement menu. Pushing menu button 1 up indicates selecting
upward, while pushing down indicating selecting downward.
2Item:
Push menu button 6 to select the desired measurement item. Push menu button
6 up to select upward, while pushing menu button 6 down to select downward.

163

Chapter 12 Gynecology Measurement

Reminder

1. When one measurement is completed, the system automatically


selects the next item (equivalent to pushing menu button 6 down once)
and performs measurement on it directly. When measurement on the
last item is completed, the system automatically selects the first item
and could measure the first item again. Push menu button 6 to select
any item to measure.
2. Maximum eight groups of measured values could be shown in
gynecology measurement. To continue to measure after eight groups,
the system automatically clears the first eight groups of measured
values and measurement tracks and takes the new group of
measurement values and tracks as the first group.

12.1.4 Exit Gynecology Measurement


Exit gynecology measurement with any operation below:
Reactivate the current view mode (B, B/B, B/M or M mode) or activate another
view mode (B, B/B, B/M or M).
Press Clear All.
Press Fucnto make the button active, then press other application button to
switch to other application (e.g., gynecology, cardiology) .

12.2 Content of Gynecology Measurement


12.2.1 Uterus
< Measurement menu >
Uterus
< Calculation formula >

H:Height,mm
W:Width,mm
L:Length,mm
V:Volume,mm3
<Measurement method>
Measure the length, width and height of uterus and calculate the volume of uterus by
11.1.2 Distance Measurement Method.
164

Chapter 12 Gynecology Measurement

< Measurement results >


Height:

Height of Uterus
mm

Length:

Length of uterus
mm

Width:

Width of uterus
mm

Volume:
Volume of uterus
3
mm

12.2.2 Cervix
<Measurement menu>
Cervix
<Calculation formula>

H:Height,mm
W:Width,mm
L:Length,mm
V:Volume,mm3
<Measurement method>
Measure the length, width and height of cervix and calculate the volume of cervix by
11.1.2 Distance Measurement Method.
<Measured results>
Height:

Height of Cervix
mm

Length:

Length of Cervix
mm

Width:

Width of Cervix
mm

Volume:
Volume of Cervix
3
mm

165

Chapter 12 Gynecology Measurement

12.2.3 Endometrium
<Measurement menu>
Endometrium
<Measurement method>
Calculate the thickness of endometrium by 11.1.2 Distance Measurement
<Measured results>
Thickness:
Thickness of endometrium
mm

12.2.4 Left Ovary, Right Ovary


<Measurement menu>
Left Ovary, Right Ovary
<Calculation formula>

H:Height,mm
W:Width,mm
L:Length,mm
V:Volume,mm3
<Measurement method>
Measure the length, width and height of Left Ovary and Right Ovary and calculate their
volumes by 11.1.2 Distance Measurement Method.
<Measured results>
Height:

Height of Left (Right) Ovary


mm

Length:

Length of Left (Right) Ovary


mm

Width:

166

Width of Left (Right)

Ovary

Chapter 12 Gynecology Measurement

mm
Volume:

Volume of Left (Right) Ovary

mm3

12.2.5 L-Follicle, R-Follicle


<Measurement menu>
L-Follicle, R-Follicle
<Calculation formula>

D:Diameter,mm
V:Volume,mm3
<Measurement method>
Measure the diameter of L-Follicle and R-Follicle by 11.1.2 Distance Measurement
Method and calculate the volume of Follicles.
<Measured results>
Dia.1:

Diameter1
mm

Dia.2:

Diameter 2
mm

Dia.3:

Diameter 3
mm

Dia.4:

Diameter 4
mm

Dia.5:

Diameter 5
mm

Vol.1

Volume1
3

mm
Vol.2

Volume2
mm3

Vol.3

Volume3
3

mm
Vol.4

Volume4
3

mm
Vol.5

Volume5
3

mm

167

Chapter 13 Obstetrics Measurement

Chapter 13 Obstetrics Measurement


13.1 Brief Introduction to Obstetrics Measurement
Obstetrics measurement is available in B mode and B/B mode only.
Measurement menu and items are the same in B mode and B/B mode.
Please refer to 11.1.1 Instructions on Measurement-related Buttons for obstetrics
measurement related buttons.
Please refer to 11.1.8 Cancellation of Measurement for cancellation of measurement.
Results of obstetrics measurement are automatically saved onto the obstetrics
measurement report. PressReportto enter the Report interface and check the report.
Please refer to 16.1 Obstetrics Measurement Report for details.

Reminder

in System Preset General


Check
and all measurement tracks and values are cleared after defreeze. P
lease refer to 8.2 General for details.

13.1.1 Ultrasound Examination in Modern Obstetrics


<Examination in Gestation Period 2 and 3>
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Location of gestation sac.


Check ultrasound image of embryo
Estimate GA by CRL
Ultrasound echo of fetal heart pulsation
Number of embryo or fetus
Whether there are accompanying space occupying lesions, such as ovarian cyst,
hysteromyoma, etc.

<Examination in Gestation Period 1>


1. General gestation examinations: number of fetus, position of fetus, position and
classification of placenta, fetal heart pulsation, fetal movement, evaluation of
continuity of spinal column, completeness of fetal limbs and quantity of amniotic
fluid.
2. Reference values for gestation age estimation: BPD, HC, AC, FL.
3. All types of ultrasound images for fetal anatomy: Encephalic anatomy and
ventricle structure, four atria and ventricles of heart and heart rate evaluation,
urological system (kidney, bladder), genital organ, mage blas, liver, umbilical
cord joint. Try the best to find the umbilical cord image.
4. Select proper fetal position to display whether the fetus has a cleft lip.
5. Learn the situation of pelvic organs, such as ovarian cyst, hysteromyoma or
168

Chapter 13 Obstetrics Measurement

ascetic fluid.

13.1.2 Introduction to obstetrics measurement functions


1.

2.

3.

4.

5.
6.

7.

Various measurement functions


Capable of measuring fetus physique index such as BPD or FL. Measurable
items include distance, circumference and area.
Capable of measuring fetal heart rate.
Capable of measuring and calculating AFI (amniotic fluid index).
Various calculation functions
Capable of measuring fetal weight based on measured physique values.
Capable of measuring ratios such as BPD/FL based on measured physique
values.
Estimate gestation week
Capable of estimating gestation week based on measured and calculated
values and reference tables.
Fetal growth diagnosis
Capable of evaluating fetal development status based on measured and
calculated values and reference tables, and quantitatively displaying estimated
value in percentage or standard deviation.
Report function
Capable of displaying all measured and calculated values in the form of report.
Image display function
Capable of displaying estimated gestation week, fetal growth evaluation
and measurement results in diagrams.
Twins Measurement
Capable of measuring fetal twins at the same time.

169

Chapter 13 Obstetrics Measurement

13.1.3 Operation Procedure of Obstetrics Measurement

Create New Patient File

Select View mode

(2) Select view mode from B or B/B.

Activate Obstetrics
Application

(3) If Fucnis not activated, press the button to


activate it. Then pressObstetricsto load
Obstetrics measurement parameters, with
Obstetrics shown on the upper right of the
screen.

Perform ultrasound
scanning and obtain
corresponding images

Freeze image to conduct


obstetrics measurement

Estimate gestation period


and EDC (expected date of
childbirth)

Review the obstetrics report

170

(1) Press New Patient to open the New


Patient interface, enter the patient info and
save. Refer to Chapter 9 New Patient.

(4) Perform ultrasound scanning on the patient.


Adjust image parameters with menu buttons.
(5) Freeze image after obtaining enough image
info. Select images to be measured with the
trackball. Press Calc to enter obstetric
measurement.
(6) Calculate and estimate gestation period and
EDC (estimated date of childbirth)
with
measured data (Obstetrics measurement
Menu details for calculating gestation age and
estimated date of childbirth) .
Estimate gestation period and EDC (estimated
date of childbirth) with the input LMP data,
which could be put in either when creating
new patient (refer to Ch. 8 New Patient ), or
when performing obstetrics examinations (refer
to 13.2.3 Obstetrics Measurement Directly
Calculating Gestation Week and Estimated
Date of Childbirth).
(7) PressReportto open the Report interface
and review the obstetrics report. Refer to 16.1
Obstetrics Report for details.

Chapter 13 Obstetrics Measurement

Reminder

Only when Preset Application setting Obstetric Edit data


Measerment Region is set as Obstetric can the operator enter
obstetric measurement through obstetric application, freeze and
Calc.

13.1.4 Realize Switch Between Calculating GA (gestation age) and Calculating FW


(fetal weight) and AFI (amniotic fluid index) Through Obstetrics Measurement Menu
After obstetrics measurement is activated, menu turns into:
1 Menu
2 Early Gest.
3 DGA
5 Scrol items

6 Item

Push menu button 2

1 Menu
2 Fetal P.&AFI
3 DGA
5 Scrol items
6 Item
If the current menu reads Obstetric MeasurementFetal P & AFI, then push menu
button 2 to switch to Obstetric MeasurementEarly Gest.
If the current menu reads Obstetric MeasurementEarly Gest, then push menu
button 2 to switch to Obstetric MeasurementFetal P & AFI.

13.1.5 Exit Obstetrics Measurement


Exit obstetrics measurement by any operation below:
Reactivate the current view mode (B, B/B, B/M or M mode) or activate another
view mode (B, B/B, B/M or M).
Press Clear All.
Press Functo make the button active, then press other application button to
switch to other application (e.g., gynecology, cardiology) .

13.2 Obstetrics Measurement Calculating GA and EDC


13.2.1 Basic Knowledge of estimating gestation age
1. Estimate gestation age in the first three month of gestation
Week 4-6: Gestation Sac (GS) recognizable.
Week 5-7: Intravascular echo (primitive atrium pulsation of fetus; yolk sac) occurs.
Week 7-9: Fetus echo recognizable; CRL Crown Rump Length measurable.
Week 7-12: Estimate gestation age by CRL. The accuracy of CRL measurement is
the highest during this period, with an error of about 5 days.
2. Estimate gestation age in the middle three months of gestation
As the CRL deviation increases during this period, BPD, FL and AC measurement
are used more.
Biparietal Diameter (BPD):
Use BPD alone to estimate. The standard deviation comes to be 1-1.5 weeks
at the 12th-20th gestation week and increases to 1.5-2 weeks at the 20th-30th
gestation week.
Head Circumference (HC):
HC estimation is more accurate than BPD in the last three months of gestation
171

Chapter 13 Obstetrics Measurement

because it is not influenced by deformation of fetal head.


Abdominal Circumference (AC):
AC measurement will be influenced in the following situations:
Too little amniotic fluid, malposition, congenitally abnormal stress on abdomen
Fetal spinal cord pointing upward or downward
Fetal magenblase invisible
Fetal ascetic fluid
Femur Length (FL)
Echo images help correctly measure FL. If FL alone is used to estimate
gestation age during the middle three months of gestation, the standard
deviation is the same as that of BPD measurement.
3. Estimate gestation age in the last three months of gestation
1 During this period, the fetal head growth slows down, and shape of the fetal
head changes drastically. Therefore, BPD measurement alone is not
accurate in measuring gestation age. HC measurement is of reference value.
2 Overall speaking, due to large size of the fetus and shrinking space of the
uterus, error from any single factor measurement would be significant.
3 It is suggested that gestation age evaluation should be based on the
measurement of multiple factors.
4 Generally speaking, the average of the following reference values should be
taken for fetus of 30-36 weeks:
BPD
AC
FL
5 The average of the following reference values should be taken for fetus of
36-40 weeks:
HC
AC
FL

13.2.2 Obstetrics Measurement Menu Details for Calculating GA and EDC


Operations of Obstetrics Measurement Calculating GA and EDC are the same in B
mode and B/B mode. The below explanation is based on B mode only.
In B mode, activate obstetrics measurement (refer to 13.1.2 Activate Obstetrics
Measurement) , then enter Calculating GA and EDC (refer to 13.1.4 Realize switch
between Calculate GA and EDC and Calculate FW and AFI with obstetrics
measurement menu . The interface shows as below:

172

Chapter 13 Obstetrics Measurement

Figure 13.2.2-1 Obstetrics Measurement in B Mode-Calculate GA and EDC


1 Menu
As shown in the left of Figure 13.2.2-1, the system provides obstetrics
measurement menu, which read GS, CRL, BPD, HC, AC, respectively.
Push menu button 1 to select the desired measurement menu. Pushing menu
button 1 up indicates selecting upward, while pushing down indicates selecting
downward.

Reminder

1. The menu shown in the left of Figure 13.2.2-1 could be preset.


Please refer to 8.8.2 Set obstetrics measurement.
2. Each measurement menu has one or multiple gestation age
calculation formula (the formula title being shown on the upper right
corner of the screen). The formula to be selected could be preset.
173

Chapter 13 Obstetrics Measurement

Please refer to 8.8.3 Set obstetrics measurement.


2 Fetal P. & AFI:
Push menu button 2 to switch into Calculating FW and AFI.
3 Push menu button 3, enter the DGA/EDC interface, directly estimate DGA and
EDC by inputting LMP, etc. Refer to 13.2.3 Directly Estimate DGA and EDC.
4 Item:
Push menu button 6 to select the desired measurement item. Push menu button
6 up indicates selecting upward, while pushing menu button 6 down indicating
selecting downward.

Reminder

1. When one measurement is completed, the system automatically


selects the next item (equivalent to pushing down menu button 6 once)
and performs measurement directly. When measurement of the last
item is completed, the system automatically selects the first item and
measures again. Push menu button 6 to select any item to measure
2. Maximum eight groups of measured values could be shown in
obstetrics measurement. To continue to measure after eight groups,
the system automatically clears the first eight groups of measured
values and tracks and takes the new group of measured values and
tracks as the first group.

13.2.3 Obstetrics Measurement Directly Calculate DGA/EDC


On the Obstetrics measurement Calculate DGA/EDC interface, push menu button 3
to enter the DGA/EDC screen, as shown in the below Figure:

Figure 13.2.3 DGA/EDC

174

Chapter 13 Obstetrics Measurement

Reminder

1. This interface has the same function as DGA Calculated on the


New Patient screen. The operator could select different basis and
input data and directly calculate DGA and EDC
2. When the interface opens, the LMP value and EDC value are the
same as that in New Patient

1LMP: Press Set to select


, and input the LMP date in the
corresponding edit box on its right. The system then calculates DGA and EDC
based on LMP.
, and input the EDC date in the
2EDC: Press Set to select
corresponding edit box on its right. The system then calculates DGA based on
EDC.
, input Weeks and Days and the
3First DGA: PressSetto select
current Date. The system then calculates DGA and EDC.
, and input Weeks and
4Todays DGA: Press Setto select
Days in the edit box on its right. The system then calculates EDC.
5OK: ClickOKto save the setting and exit the DGA Input interface. The system
calculates DGA and EDC with the chosen basis and displays the result on the
right of the screen.
6Cancel: ClickCancelto directly exit the DGA Input interface.

13.2.4 Obstetrics Measurement General Description of Calculating DGA and EDC


<Measured Parts>
GS, CRL, LV, BPD, OFD, HC, TAD, LVW, HW, TCD, IOD, OOD, BD, APTD, TTD, AC,
APD, FTA, HL, ULNA, RAD, FL, TIB, FIB, APTDxTTD, CLAV.
<Measurement Method>
1. Push menu button 1 to select the part to be measured.
2. Make measurement by corresponding methods. To decrease errors, the operator
could continuously measure (maximum three measurements) and the system
would automatically calculate the average value and display it on Avg on the
right of the screen. Please refer to 11.1 Basic Measurement Method for the
relevant measurement methods.
3. When measurement is completed, the system would calculate GA and FW based
on the Avg values and display the results on the screen.
4. To directly calculate DGA and EDC, push menu button 3 to enter the DGA/EDC
interface. Please refer to 13.2.3 Obstetrics Measurement-Directly Calculate
DGA/EDC.
<Measurement Results>

175

Chapter 13 Obstetrics Measurement

1:

Measured Value No. 1


mm

2:

Measured Value No. 2


mm

3:

Measured Value No. 3


mm

Avg.:
GA:

Average of Measured
mm Values
Gestation Age

EDC U/S:

Calculating EDC

DGA:

Directly
DGA
Directly
EDC

EDC

Estimated
Estimated

13.3 Obstetrics Measurement Calculate FW and AFI


13.3.1 Obstetrics Measurement Menu Details of Calculating FW and AFI
Operations of Obstetrics Measurement Calculate FW and AFI are the same in B
mode and B/B mode. The below explanation is based on B mode only.
Activate obstetrics measurement (refer to 13.1.2 Activate Obstetrics Measurement) in
B mode, then enter Calculate GA and EDC (refer to 13.1.4 Realize switch between
calculating GA and EDC and calculating FW & AFI through obstetrics measurement
menu. The interface shows as below:

176

Chapter 13 Obstetrics Measurement

Figure 13.2.3-1 Obstetrics Measurement in B Mode Calculate FW and AFI


(1) Menu:
As shown in the left of Figure 13.1.2-1, the system provides obstetrics
measurement menu, including fetal weight calculation formulas of AFI, Shepard,
Hadlock_1, Hadlock_2 and
Hadlock_3. Push menu button 1 to select the desired measurement menu.
Pushing menu button 1 up indicates selecting upward, while pushing down
indicating to selecting downward.
(2) GA (Gestation Age):
Push menu button 2 to switch into Calculate GA and EDC.
(3) Push menu button 3, enter the DGA/EDC interface, directly estimate DGA and
177

Chapter 13 Obstetrics Measurement

EDC by inputting LMP, etc. Refer to 13.2.3 Directly Estimate DGA and EDC.
(4) Item:
Push menu button 6 to select the desired measurement item. Pushing menu
button 6 up indicates selecting upward, while pushing menu button 6 down
indicating selecting downward.

Reminder

1. When one measurement is completed, the system automatically


selects the next item (equivalent to pushing down menu button 6 once)
and performs measurement directly. When measurement of the last
item is completed, the system automatically selects the first item and
measures again. Push menu button 6 to select any item to measure.
2. Maximum eight groups of measured values could be shown in
obstetrics measurement. To continue to measure after eight groups,
the system automatically clears the first eight groups of measured
values and tracks and takes the new group of measured values and
tracks as the first group.

13.3.2 Obstetrics Measurement General Introduction to Calculating AFI


<Measured Part>
The amniotic fluid index of the four quadrants of the uterus
<Measurement method>
1. Measure the AFI of the four quadrants respectively by the method in 11.1.2
Distance Measurement.
2. The system takes the sum of the AFI of the four quadrants as the Total AFI.
<Measurement results>
Q1:
mm
Q2:
mm
Q3:
mm
Q4:
mm
AFI:

AFI of the upper left


quadrant
AFI of the bottom left
quadrant
AFI of the upper right
quadrant
AFI of the bottom right
quadrant
Total AFI

mm

13.3.3 Obstetrics Measurement General Introduction to Calculating FW

178

Table of Corresponding Measured Parts and Formula for Fetal Weight Calculation

Chapter 13 Obstetrics Measurement

Title
Shepard

Measured
Parts
BPD AC

Calculation Formula
FW=3 - 1.7492 + 0.166*BPD + 0.046* AC -0.002646* AC *
BPD

Hadlock_1

AC FL

FW=1.304 + 0.05281* AC + 0.1938*FL-0.004* AC * FL

Hadlock_2

AC FL

FW=1.335 - 0.0034* AC *FL + 0.0316* BPD + 0.0457* AC


+ 0.1623*FL

Hadlock_3

AC HC FL

FW=1.326 - 0.00326* AC * FL + 0.0107*HC + 0.0438* AC


+ 0.158* FL

Hadlock_4

BPD AC HC
FL

FW=1.3596 - 0.00386*AC * FL + 0.0064* HC + 0.00061*


BPD*AC + 0.0424*AC + 0.174* FL

Hadlock_5

BPD AC

FW=1.11 + 0.05845* AC - 0.000604* AC * AC - 0.007365*


BPD *BPD + 0.000595*BPD* AC + 0.1694*BPD

Mertz

BPD AC

FW=157.07* AC - 3200.4 + 15.9* BPD*BPD

Osaka U.

BPD FL FTA

FW=1.256*BPD * BPD *BPD + 3.5065*FTA*FL + 6.3

Tokyo U.1

BPD
TTD

APTD

FW=1.73 * BPD * BPD * BPD + 28*APTD* TTD - 217

Tokyo U.2

BPD APTD
TTD FL

FW=1.07* BPD *BPD * BPD + 3.42* APTD *TTD *FL

Hansmann

BPD TTD

FW=1000*(0.515263 - 1.05775* BPD - 0.020562*TTD*


TTD + 0.649154*TTD + 0.0930707* BPD *BPD)

Campbell

AC

FW= 1000* EXP(0.282*AC-0.00331*AC* AC -4.564)

Measurement and Result Display for Fetal Weight Calculation


Measurement methods and format of result display are similar when conducting
measurement and calculation by various FW formulas. Below is only an example of the
Shepard formula.
<Measured parts>
BPD, AC
<Measurement method>
1. Measure BPD and AC respectively by the method in 11.1.2 Distance Measurement.
2. The system calculates FW by the BPD value and the AC value.
<Measurement results>
BPD:

Length of BPD
mm

AC:

Length of AC

mm
Fetal Weight Calculated FW
g

179

Chapter 14 Urology Measurement

Chapter 14 Urology Measurement


14.1 Brief Introduction to Urology Measurement
Urology measurement is available in B mode and B/B mode only.
Measurement menu and items are the same in B mode and B/B mode.
Please refer to 11.1.1 Instructions on Measurement-related Buttons for urology
measurement related buttons.
Please refer to 11.1.9 Cancellation of Measurement for cancellation of measurement.
Results of urology measurement are automatically saved onto the urology measurement
report. PressReportto enter the Report interface and check. Please refer to 16.4
Urology Measurement Report for details.
in System Preset General
Check
and all measurement tracks and values are cleared after defreeze.
Please refer to 8.2 General for details.

14.1.1 Introduction to Urology Measurement Functions


1.

Various Measurement Functions


Measure the length, width and height of prostate and calculate the volume of
prostate.
Measure the length, width and height of trans zone and calculate the volume of
trans zone.
Measure the length, width and height of bladder and calculate the volume of
bladder.
Measure the length, width and height of urine and calculate the volume of urine.
Measure the length,width and height of Ovary and caculate the volume of ovary.
Measure the diameter of follicle and caculate the volume of follicle.
2. Calculate volume by slices
Measure the area of cross-sectional slices through tracing of multiple slice
images in the B mode, then calculate the corresponding volume by multiplying
the area with the distance between slices.
3. Early Diagnosis of Dislocation of Hip Joint on Neo Natals and Babies
Evaluate the type of hip joint dislocation by bony roof angle, cartilage roof angle,
together with the age of babies.
4. Report Function
Capable of displaying all measured and calculated values in the format of report

180

Chapter 14 Urology Measurement

14.1.2 Urology Measurement Operation Procedure

Create New Patient File

Select View mode

Apply Urology Application

1 Press New Patto open the New Patient


interface, input the patient info and save. Refer
to Chapter 9 New Patient.

(2) Select view mode from B or B/B.

(3) If Fucnis not activated, press the button to


activate it. Then pressSmall Partto load
Urology measurement parameters, with
Small Part shown on the upper right of the

Perform ultrasound
scanning and obtain
corresponding images

(4) Perform ultrasound scanning on the patient.


Adjust image parameters with menu buttons.

Freeze image to conduct


urology measurement

(5) Freeze image after obtaining enough image


Info.. Select images to be measured with the
trackball, then pressCalcto enter urology
measurement

Review the urology report

(6) PressReportto open the Report interface


and review the urology report. Refer to 16.4
Urology Report.

Reminder

Only when Preset Application setting Urology Edit data


Measerment Region is set as Urology & Others can the operator
enter Urology measurement through Urology Application, Freeze and
Calc.

14.1.3 Menu Details of Urology Measurement


Urology measurement operations are the same in B mode and B/B mode. The below
explanation is based on B mode only.
After applying urology measurement in the B mode, the below interface shows up:

181

Chapter 14 Urology Measurement

Figure 14.1.3-1 Urology Measurement in B Mode


1Menu:
As shown in the left of Figure 14.1.3-1, the system provides urology measurement menu,
including Prostate V, Trans Zone V, Urine V, Slice V and HipJ.Angle. Push menu
button 1 to select the desired measurement menu. Pushing up menu button 1 indicates
selecting upward, while pushing down indicating selecting downward.
2Serum PSA:
Push menu button 3 to enter the PSA interface, input the corresponding values,
as shown in Figure 14.1.2

182

Chapter 14 Urology Measurement

Figure 14.1.3 PSA Interface

3Item:
The operator could push menu button 6 to select the desired measurement item. Pushing
menu button 6 up indicates selecting upward, while pushing menu button 6 down indicating
selecting downward.

Reminder

1. When one measurement is completed, the system automatically


selects the next item (equivalent to pushing down menu button 6 once)
and performs measurement directly. When the measurement of the
last item is completed, the system automatically selects the first item
and measures again. The operator could select any item to measure
by pushing menu button 6.
2. Maximum eight groups of measured values could be shown in
urology measurement. To continue to measure after eight groups, the
system automatically clears the first eight groups of measured values
and tracks and takes the new group as the first group.

14.1.4 Exit Urology Measurement


Exit urology measurement by any operation below:
Reactivate the current view mode (B, B/B, B/M or M mode) or activate another
view mode (B, B/B, B/M or M).
Press Clear All.
Press Fucnto make the button active, then press other application button to
switch to other application (e.g., gynecology,cardiology) .

183

Chapter 14 Urology Measurement

14.2 Content of Urology Measurement


14.2.1 Prostate V
<Measurement menu>
1. Prostate V: Prostate Volume
2. Prostate V can be used to measure the volume of prostate and to estimate PSA
(prostate specific antigen).
<Measure Parts>

<Measurement results>
Height

Height of Prostate
mm

Length

Length of Prostate
mm

Width

Width of Prostate
mm

Volume

Volume of Prostate
ml

SPSA

Serum Prostate Specific Antigen

ng/ml
Prostate Specific Antigen Level
Pred.PSA
ng Predicted by Prostate Volume
Density of Prostate Specific Antigen
PSA Dens.

<Calculation formula>
Volume = Length * Width * Height * 0.000523
SPSA=0.12*V, unit ng
PSA Dens.=Serum PSA/V, unit ng/ml
Push menu button 3 to input the serum PSA value.
PSA Dens.: Predicted PSA level by whole gland volume
PSA: Prostate Specific Antigen
Ng: Nomogram
184

Chapter 14 Urology Measurement

<Measurement method>
Measure the length, width and height of prostate by 11.1.2 Distance Measurement
Method and the system would calculate the prostate volume.

14.2.2 Trans Zone V


<Measurement menu>
Trans Zone Volume
<Measured parts>

<Measurement results>
Height

Height of Trans Zone


mm

Length

Length of Trans Zone


mm

Width

Width of Trans Zone


mm

Volume

Trans Zone Volume


ml

TZPSA

Trans Zone Prostate Specific


Antigen
ng

<Calculation formula>
Volume= Length* Width* Height * 0.000523
TZPSA= Length* Width* Height * 0.000084
<Measurement method>
Measure the length, width and height of trans zone by 11.1.2 Distance Measurement
Method. The system then calculates the Trans Zone Volume and the Trans Zone
Prostate Specific Antigen.

14.2.3

Bladder V
<Measurement menu>
Bladder Volume

185

Chapter 14 Urology Measurement

<Measured parts>
Width

Length

Height

<Measurement results>
Height

Bladder Height
mm

Length

Bladder Length
mm

Width

Bladder Width
mm

Volume

Bladder Volume
ml

<Calculation formula>
Volume=Length* Width* Height * 0.000523
<Measurement method>
Measure the length, width and height of bladder by 11.1.2 Distance Measurement
Method and the system calculates the Bladder Volume.

14.2.4 Urine V
<Measurement menu>
Urine Volume
<Measured Parts>
Residual urine in bladder
<Measurement results><Measurement Formula>
Same as bladder measurement
<Measurement method>
On a bladder image, measure the length, width and height of residual urine and the
system calculates the volume of urine.

186

Chapter 14 Urology Measurement

14.3 Other Measurements


14.3.1 Slice V
<Measurement menu>
Slice V measurement
Slice Volume is calculated by multiplying the area of multiple cross-sectional slices of
B mode images, which are obtained through tracing, by the distance between slices.
<Measured Parts>

<Measurement results>
Slice-01
Volume

No. of the currently measured slice


Volume calculated from area and distance
ml

PCAR
Pitch

PCAR value currently being measured


Distance between slices (thickness of
slices)
mm

Area

Area of slice
2

cm
Girth

Circumference of slice
cm

187

Chapter 14 Urology Measurement

<Calculation of Volume>

<Volume calculation formula>


Volume = 1/2 *P1 (S1 +S2) +1/2 *P2 (S2 +S3) ++ 1/2 *Pn-2 (Sn-2 +Sn-1) + 1/2
*Pn-1 (Sn-1 +Sn)
S1, S2 Sn-1, Sn is the area of each cross-sectional slicerefer to 11.4.2 Trace
measurement method
P1, P2, Pn-1, Pn is the slice pitch, that is, the height of slices (unit : mm). Push
menu button 3, enter the slice pitch interface and input the value of distance between
slices (the height of slices), the value range being 1~99mm.
<PCAR Calculation Method>

<PCAR Calculation Formula>


Area of a hypothetical circle S=*l/2
Area of a cross-sectional slice: Area of a hypothetical circle (PCAR) = S/ S
The ratio of the area of the largest cross-sectional slice to that of the hypothetical circle
is called PCAR, whereas the circumference of the slice image is the same as that of
the hypothetical circle, which are both I.
<Measurement method>
Enter the slice area measurement menu, push menu button 3 to enter the slice pitch
188

Chapter 14 Urology Measurement

interface to input the value (height of slice), with a value range of 1~99mm; With
reference to 11.4.2 Trace Measurement Method, measure the slice area Slice-01,
and the system automatically calculates the corresponding Area, Girth, Volume, PCAR,
etc. When the measurement of this slice is completed, push menu button 6 to enter the
measurement of the next slice.

14.3.2 HipJ.Angle
<Measurement menu>
HipJ.Angle measurement.
This measurement is used in orthopedics to perform early diagnosis of hip joint
dislocation in neo-natal and babies.
Besides, with this measurement, the type of dislocation could also be evaluated from
the age of babies and the angle of bones.
<Measured Parts>

A
1
D
a

2
O

1
2
3

E
3

d
c
C

b
c
d

Basic lineVector AB
Acetabular roof lineVector CD
Inclination lineVector EF
Bony roof angle
Cartilage roof angle
Intersecting point of acetabular
cartilage periost and bones wall
Edge of acetabular bone
Edge of lower bones
Major echo wave from edge of
acetabular
Intersecting point of acetabular roof
line and Inclination line

<Measurement results>
Alpha

Beta

TYPE

Angle
Angle
Type of
dislocation

189

Chapter 14 Urology Measurement

<Measurement method>
1.

Roll the trackball, move the cursor to the


intersecting point of acetabular cartilage
periosteum and bones wall, which lies on the
Basic line (Vector AB). PressSetto fix the point.

2.

Roll the trackball along the Basic line (Vector AB),


move the cursor to the intersecting point O of the
acetabular roof line and the inclination line (Refer
to <Measured Parts>) .

3.

4.

5.

PressSetto fix the intersecting point O of the


Acetabular roof line and the Inclination line. At this
time, the measuring line automatically extends to
doubles its length. The extended measuring line
is the common side of angle and , whereas the
intersecting point O is the vertex of angle and .

Move the trackball, create the second side of


angle , and move the cursor to point C of the
acetabular roof line (refer to <measured parts>).
PressSetto fix point C, that is, to fix the second
side of angle . Finish measuring angle , and in
the meantime, fix the second side of angle
(currently coincides with the second side of angle
).

+ x.xx

Set

+ x.xx A

O
B

+ 40
40

Set

Roll the trackball, create the second side of angle


and move the cursor to point F on the inclination
line (refer to<measured parts>). PressSetto fix
point F, that is, to fix the second side of angle .
Finish measuring angle .

+ 40
50

Set

190

Chapter 14 Urology Measurement

In the above diagrams, point A, B, C, F and O are not shown on the


screen.

Classification Table of Type of Dislocation:

60
60
5059

55
55
55

4349

7077
77
77

43
43

77

Normal
Age less than 3 months
Age at or above 3 months
Dangerous Status
Non-dangerous Status

Type
a
b
a
b
c
D
a
b

Obvious dislocation of acetabulum of cartilage


Cartilage acetabulum located between head of
femur and bone (perch disjoint)
(Classification by Graf Method)

191

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement


15.1 Brief Introduction to Cardiology Measurement
Cardiology measurement is available in B mode, B/B mode, B/M mode and M mode.
Measurement menu and items are the same in B and B/B modes; and are the same in
B/M mode and M mode.
Please refer to 11.1.1 Instructions on Measurement-related Buttons for cardiology
measurement related buttons.
Please refer to 11.1.8 Cancellation of Measurement for cancellation of measurement.
Results of cardiology measurement are automatically saved onto the cardiology
measurement report. PressReportto enter the Report interface and check the report.
Please refer to 16.3 Cardiology Measurement Report for details.
in System Preset General
Check
and all measurement tracks and values are cleared after defreeze.
Please refer to 8.2 General for details.

15.1.1 Introduction to Cardiology Measurement Functions


1.

Various Measurement Functions


LV-Volume measurement in B mode and B/B mode. Abundant calculation
formulas such as Pombo, Teichholz, Gibson, S.Plane Ellipse, Biplane Ellipse,
Bullet and Simpson are provided.
LV-Function measurement in B mode and B/B mode. Pombo, Teichholz and
Gibson formulas are provided.
B-LV measurement in B mode and B/B mode. Capable of measuring and
calculating parameters such as Long Axis, Wall L-Axis, Short Axis and
Cardio-Apex, etc.
LV-Function measurement in B/M mode and M mode. Pombo, Teichholz and
Gibson formulas are provided.
Volume measurement in B/M mode and M mode. Capable of measuring and
calculating parameters of Mitral Valve, Aortic Valve, Tricuspid Valve and
Pulmonary Valve, etc.
LV-Volume measurement in B/M mode and M mode. Pombo, Teichholz and
Gibson formulas are provided.
2. Calculate BSA (body surface area)
Input height and weight of a human and the system calculates the body surface
area.
3. Report Function
Capable of displaying all measured and calculated values in the format of
report.
192

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

15.1.2 Operation Procedure of Cardiology Measurement

Create New Patient File

Select View mode

Apply Cardiology
Application

Perform ultrasound
scanning and obtain
corresponding images

Freeze image to conduct


cardiology measurement

Review the cardiac report

(1) PressNew Patto open the New Patient


interface, enter the patient info and save. Refer
to Chapter 9 New Patient.

(2) Select view mode from B or B/B.

(3) If Fucnis not activated, press the button to


activate it. Then press Cardiac to load
cardiology
measurement parameters, with
Cardiac shown on the upper right of the
screen.
(4) Perform ultrasound scanning on the patient.
Adjust image parameters with menu buttons.

(5) Freeze image after obtaining enough image


Info.. Select images to be measured with the
trackball, then pressCalcto enter cardiac
measurement.
(6) PressReportto open the Report interface
and review the cardiac report. Refer to 16.3
Cardiac Report.

15.1.3 Menu Details of Cardiac Measurement


Cardiac measurement operations are the same in B mode and B/B mode. The below
explanation is based on B mode only.
When cardiac measurement in B mode is activated, the below interface shows up:

193

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

Figure 15.1.3-1 Cardiac Measurement in B Mode


1

Menu:
As shown in the left of Figure 15.1.3-1, the system provides cardiac measurement
menu, which is divided into three groups of LV-Volume, LV Function and B-LV.
Push menu button 1 to select the desired measurement menu. Pushing menu button 1
up indicates selecting upward, while pushing down indicating selecting downward.
HR/BSA:
Push menu button 3 and the new interface pops up. Input Heart Rate, as well as
height and weight to calculate BSA-body surface area, as shown in the below Figure:

194

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

Heart Rate: Click the [Heart Rate] edit box and input the heart rate value, unit being
bpm.
BSA Calculated: Click the [Height] edit box to input the height of the patient, unit being
cm; Then click the [Weight] edit box to input the weight of the patient. The system
calculates BSA and displays it on the screen.
<BSA Calculation Formula>
BSA=0.007184*W0.425* H0.725
BSA: Body Surface Area
W: Weight
H: Height
Scroll Items:
Perform cardiac measurement in B/M mode. When measuring items such as
"LV-Pombo" "LV-Teich" and "LV-Gibson", 5 Scroll Item is added to the menu, which is
used to scroll down the menu on the right of the image.
Item:
The operator could push the menu button 6 to select the desired measurement item.
Pushing up menu button 6 indicates selecting upward, while pushing menu button 6
down indicating selecting downward.

195

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

1. When one measurement is completed, the system automatically selects


the next item (equivalent to pushing down menu button 6 once) and performs
measurement directly. When the measurement of the last item is completed,
the system automatically selects the first item and measures again. The
operator could select any item to measure by pushing menu button 6.
2. Maximum eight groups of measured values could be shown in cardiac
measurement. To continue to measure after eight groups, the system
automatically clears the first eight groups of measured values and tracks and
takes the new group as the first group.

15.1.4 Exit Cardiac Measurement


Exit cardiac measurement by any operation below
Reactivate the current view mode (B, B/B, B/M or M mode) or activate another
view mode (B, B/B, B/M or M).
Press Clear All.
Press Fucnto make the button active, then press other application button to
switch to other application (e.g., gynecology, obstetrics).

15.2 Content of Cardiac Measurement


The content of cardiac measurement is the same in B mode and B/B mode. Its the same
in B/M mode and M mode. Please refer to the tables below:

15.2.1 Measurement Menu, Measured Items, Input Items and Calculated Items of
LV-Volume Measurement in B Mode and B/B Mode
Menu
Pombo
Teichholz
Gibson

Item
LVIDdLVIDs

Input Item

Calculated Item

Heart Rate
Height
Weight

EDVESVSVSVI
COCOIEFFS
BSA

Heart Rate
Height
Weight

EDVESVSVSVI
COCOIEFBSA

S.Plane ELP.
LVLAdLVLAsLVLdLVL s
(Single Plane Ellipse)
LVLAd LVLAs LVSAMVd
Biplane ELP.
Biplane Ellipse LVSAMVsLVSLMVdLVSLMVs
Bullet

LVSAPMdLVSAPMsLVLdLVLs

Simpson

LVLdLVLsLVSAMVdLVSAMVs
LVSLMVdLVSLMVs

15.2.2 Measurement Menu, Measured items, Input Items and Calculated Items of
LV-Function Measurement in B Mode and B/B Mode

196

Menu

Item

LV-Pombo

TVSd, TVSs,LVIDd,

Input Item
Heart Rate

Calculated Item
EDV,ESV,SV,SVI,CO,C

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

( Left Ventricle Pombo) LVIDs,LVPWd, LVPWs


LV-Teich.
( Left Ventricle Teichholz)
LV-Gibson
( Left Ventricle Gibson )

Height
Weight

OI,EF,FS,BSA,
IVS/LVPW

15.2.3 Measurement Menu, Measured Items, Input Items and Calculated Items of B-LV
Measurement in B Mode and B/B Mode
Menu
Long Axis
Wall L-Axis
(Wall Long Axis)
Short Axits
Cardio-Apex

Item
LVDd,LVDs,
AODs

Calculated Item

LADd,LADs,

AODd,

TVSd, TVSs, TVPWd, TVPW s

LA/AO
IVS/LVPW, IVSTF,
LVPWTF

MVA,
LVSLMVd,LVSLMVs,
Area EF
LVSAMVd, LVSAMVs
LVLAd,LVLAs, LVLd, LVL s

Area EF

15.2.4 Measurement Menu, Measured Items, Input Items and Calculated Items of
LV-function Measurement in B/M Mode and M Mode
Menu

Item

Input Item

LV-Pombo
( Left Ventricle Pombo)
TVSd, TVSs,LVIDd,
LV-Teich.
LVIDs,LVPWd,
( Left Ventricle Teichholz)
LVPWs
LV-Gibson
( Left Ventricle Gibson )

Heart Rate
Height
Weight

Calculate Item

EDV,ESV,SV,SVI,CO,COI,EF,
FS,BSA, MVCF

15.2.5 Measurement Menu, Measured Items, Input Items and Calculated Items of
Volume Measurement in B/M Mode and M Mode
Menu

Item

MV
EPSS,C-E,C-A,E-F,LVOTD,HR
Mitral Valve
AV
RVOTd,RVOTs,AODd,AODs,LADd,LADs,ET,AVD,HR
Aortic Valve
TV
Tricuspid
Value

E-F SLP,C-E,C-A,D-E SLEP,D-E,HR

PV
Pulmonic
Valve

A WAVE,E-F SLP,B-C SLEP,B-C,HR

Calculated Item
A/E
LA/AO

A/E

197

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

15.2.6 Measurement Menu, Measured Items, Input items and Calculated Items of
LV-Volume Measurement in B/M Mode and M mode

Menu
Pombo
Teichholz
Gibson

Item

Input Item

Calculated Item

Heart Rate
EDV,ESV,SV,SVI,CO,COI,EF,FS
Height
,BSA
Weight

LVIDd,LVIDs

15.2.7 Explanation of Measurement Parameters and the Menu Showing the Parameters
Parameter

Explanation

Menu that shows the parameter

LVIDd
LVIDs

Left Ventricle Inner Diameterdiastole Pombo,Teichholz, Gibson,


Left Ventricle Inner Diametersystole LV-Pombo, LV-Teichholz,
LV-Gibson

LVPWd
LVPWs
IVSd
IVSs

Left Ventricle Posterior Wall(diastole)


Left Ventricle Posterior Wall(systole)
Interventricular Septum (diastole)
Interventricular Septum (systole)

LVDd
LVDs

Left Ventricle Diameterdiastole


Left Ventricle Diametersystole

LVSLMVd

Left Ventricle Short-axis Length at


Mitral Valve (diastole)
Left Ventricle Short-axis Length at
Mitral Valve (systole)

LVSLMVs

LVSAMVd
LVSAMVs

LVSAPMd
LVSAPMs

Wall of long axis


LV-Pombo,LV-Teichholz,LV-Gibson

Long axis

Left Ventricle Short-axis Area at Mitral


Valve (diastole)
Left Ventricle Short-axis Area at Mitral
Valve (diastole)
Left Ventricle Short-axis
Papillary Muscles (diastole)
Left Ventricle Short-axis
Papillary Muscles (systole)

Area

at

Area

at

LVLd
LVLs

Left Ventricle Long-axis (diastole)


Left Ventricle Long-axis (systole)

LVLAd

Left Ventricle Long-axis Area (diastole)


Left Ventricle Long-axis Area (systole)

LVLAs
LADd
LADs

198

Left Atrium Diameter (diastole)


Left Atrium Diameter (systole

Short axis, Biplane ellipse

Short axis, Biplabe ellipse,


Simpson

Short axis, Bullet, Simpson

Cardiac apex, Single plane ellipse,


Bullet, Simpson
Cardiac apex, Single plane ellipse,
Biplane ellipse
Long axis

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

AODd
AODs

Root of Aorta Diameter (diastole)


Root of Aorta Diameter (systole)

Long axis

MVAd
MVAs

Mitral Valve Area (diastole)


Mitral Valve Area (systole)

Short axis

HR
LVE

Heart Rate
Left ventricle Ejection Period

C-E
C-A
E-FSLP
EPSS
LVOTD

Mitral valve C-E amplitude


Mitral valve C-A amplitude
Mitral valve Return speedDDR
Separation Septum from E-point
Left Ventricle Output Diameter

LADd
LADs
AODd
AODs
AVD
RVOTd

Left Atrium Diameter (diastole)


Left Atrium Diameter (systole)
Root of Aorta Diameterdiastole
Aortic valve Diameter (systole)
Aortic valve Diameter
Right ventricular output tracts diameter

E-F SLP
C-E
C-A
D-E SLP
D-E

Tricuspid valve return rate


Tricuspid valve C-E amplitude
Tricuspid valve C-A amplitude
Tricuspid valve release rate
Tricuspid valve D-E amplitude

A WAVE
E-F SLP
B-C SLP
B-C

Pulmonic Valve A wave amplitude


Pulmonic Valve release rate
Pulmonic Valve return rate
Pulmonic Valve B-C wave amplitude

Mitral Valve

Aortic Valve

Tricuspid Value

Pulmonic Valve

15.2.8 Explanation of Calculated Parameters, Formula and the Menu Showing the
Calculated Parameters
Parameter

Explanation

EDV

ESV

End Diastolic
Volume
End Systolic Volume

Calculation Formula
Pombo
EDV=(LVIDd)3
ESV=(LVIDd)3
Teichholz
EDV=7.0*(LVIDd)3/(2.4+ LVIDd)
ESV=7.0*(LVIDd)3/(2.4+ LVIDs)

Measurement Menu
Showing the Parameters
Pombo,LV-Pombo

Teichholz,LV-Teichholz

199

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

Gibson
EDV=(/6)
LVIDd+5.90)
ESV=(/6)
LVIDs+4.18)

*(LVIDd)2*(0.98*
Gibson,LV-Gibson
*(LVIDs)2*(1.14*

Monoplane ellipse
EDV=8.0*(LVLAd)2/(3*LVLd)
ESV=8.0*(LVLAs)2/(3*LVLs)
Biplane ellipse
EDV=8.0*LVLAd*LVSAMVd
/(3* LVSAMVd)
ESV=8.0*LVLAs*LVSAMVs
/(3* LVSAMVs)

Biplane ellipse

Bullet
EDV=(5*LVSAPMd*LVLd) /6
ESV=(5*LVSAPMs*LVLs) /6

Bullet

Simpson
EDV=(LVLd/9)
*{4*LVSAMVd+2*LVSAPMd+(LV
SAMVd*LVSAPMd) 1/2}
EDV=(LVLd/9)
*{4*LVSAMVd+2*LVSAPMd+(LV
SAMVd*LVSAPMd) 1/2}
SV

Stroke volume

SV=EDV-ESV

SVI

Stroke volume index

SVI=SV/BSA

CO

Cardiac output

CO=SV*HR/1000

COI

Cardiac output index

COI=CO/BSA

EF

Ejection fraction

BSA

Body Surface Area

HR

Heart rate

EF=SV/EDV*100%

MVCF

LVM

200

left ventricular
mass

Simpson

Pombo, Teichholz,
Gibson, Single plane
ellipse, Biplane ellipse,
Bullet, Simpson;
LV-Pombo, LV-Teichholz,
LV-Gibson

BSA=0.007184*W0.425* H0.725
IVS/LVPW =IVSd/LVPWd

Wall thickness
assessment in B, B/B
model:
W.Pombo,W.Teichholz,W.
Gibson

MVCF=LVIDd-LVIDs/
LVIDd*ET

Wall thickness
assessment in B/M, M
model:
W.Pombo,W.Teichholz,W.
Gibson

IVS/LVPW

Acroteric
fibrous
tissue
decurtation
average rate

Single plane ellipse

LVM=1.04*{(IVSd-LVIDd+LVPW
d)3}-13.6

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

Area EF

Ejection
percentage

area

Area EF=
LFSAMVd-LFSAMVs
/LVSAMVd
Area

LA/AO

LA AO ratio

EF=LVLAd-LVLAs
/LVLAd

Cardiac apex
Left ventricle
measurement in B and
B/B modes
Long Axis
Left ventricle
measurement in B/M and
M modes
AV

LA/AO

C-A/C-E
A/E

Left ventricle
measurement in B and
B/B modes
Short axis

C-A C-E ratio

Left ventricle
measurement in B/M and
M modes
MV, TV

15.3 LV-Volume Measurement in B Mode and B/B Mode


15.3.1 Pombo, Teichholz and Gibson
<Measured Parts>

<Measurement Results>
LVIDd:
Left Ventricle Inner
Diameterdiastole
cm
LVIDs:
Left Ventricle Inner
Diametersystole
cm
HR:
bpm Heart Rate
EDV:
ml End-diastole Volume

IVS
LVIDd

LVIDs

LVID

LVPW

SV:
SVI:
CO:
COI:
EF:

ESV: End-systole Volume


ml
ml Stroke Volume
Stroke Volume Index
SV/BSA
Cardiac output
l/min
Cardiac Output Index
CO/BSA
% Ejection Fraction
201

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

FS:
BSA:

% Shorten percentage
relatively
2
m Body Surface Area

<Measurement method>
1. Measure LVIDs and LVIDd by 11.1.2 Distance Measurement Method and the system
automatically calculates EDV, ESV, SV, EF, FS;
2. Then push menu button 3, enter the HR/BSA interface, input heart rate, height, weight,
and the system calculates SVI, CO, COI, and BSA.

15.3.2 S.Plane Ellipse


<Measured Parts>

LVL

LVLA

4-VentricleFigure or 2-VentricleFigure
<Measurement Method>
1. Measure LVLAd and LVLAs by 11.1.4
Trace Measurement Method
2. Measure the distance between MV and
small needle by 11.1.2 Distance
Measurement method, that is, LVLd
and LVLs. The system then calculates
EDV, ESV, SV, and EF.
3. Push menu button 3, enter the HR/BSA
interface, input heart rate, height, weight
and the system calculates SVI, CO, COI
and BSA.

<Measurement Results>
LVLAd:
Left Ventricle Long-axis
Area (diastole)
cm2
LVLd:
Left Ventricle Long-axis
(diastole)
cm
LVLAs:
Left Ventricle Long-axis
Area (systole)
2
cm
LVLs:
Left Ventricle Long-axis
(systole)
cm
HR:
bpm Heart rate
EDV:
ml End-diastolic volume
ESV: End-systolic volume
ml
SV:
ml Stroke volume
SVI:
Stroke volume index
SV/BSA
CO:
Cardiac output
l/min
COI:
Cardiac output index
(CO/BSA)
EF:
% Ejection Fraction
BSA:
m2 Body Surface Area

15.3.3 Biplane Ellipse


<Measured Parts>

202

<Measurement Results>
LVLAd:
Left Ventricle Long-axis Area

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

LVLA

4-VentricleFigure or 2-VentricleFigure

<Measurement Method>
1. Measure LVLAd and LVLAs by 11.1.4
Trace Measurement Method.
2. Measure LVSLMVd and LVSLMVs by
11.1.2
Distance
Measurement
Method and the system calculates
EDV, ESV, SV, and EF.
3. Then push menu button 3, enter the
HR/BSA interface, input heart rate,
height, weight and the system
calculates SVI, CO, COI and BSA

cm2 (diastole)
LVLAs:
Left ventricle long-axis area
2
cm [systole]
LVSAMVd:
Left ventricle short-axis area at
2
cm
Mitral valve [diastole]
LVSLMVd:
Left ventricle short-axis length at
cm Mitral valve [diastole]
LVSAMVs:
Left ventricle short-axis area at
2
cm
Mitral valve [systole]
LVSLMVs:
Left ventricle short-axis length at
cm Mitral valve[systole]
HR:
bpm Heart rate
EDV:
ml End diastolic volume
ESV:
ml End systolic volume
SV:
ml Stroke volume
SVI:
Stroke volume indexSV/BSA
CO:
Cardiac output
l/min
COI:
Cardiac output indexCO/BSA
EF:
% Ejection Fraction
BSA: Body surface area
m2

15.3.4 Bullet
<Measured Parts>

LVSAPM

LVL

Papillary muscles horizontal position


4-VentricleFigure or 2-VentricleFigure

<Measurement method>

<Measurement Results>
Left ventricle short-axis area at
LVSAPMd:
2
cm papillary muscles[diastole]
LVSAPMs:
Left ventricle short-axis area at
cm2 papillary muscles [systole]
LVLd:
Left ventricle long-axis length
cm [diastole]
LVLs:
Left ventricle long-axis length
cm [systole]
HR:
EDV:
ESV:
SV:

bpm
ml
ml
ml

Heart rate
End diastolic volume
End systolic volume
Stroke volume
203

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

1.

2.

3.

Measure LVSVPMd and LVSVPMs


by 11.1.4 Trace Measurement
Method
Measure LVLd and LVLs, that is the
distance between the cardiac apex
to the middle point of mistral valve,
by 11.1.2 Distance Measurement
Method, and the system calculates
EDV, ESV, SV, and EF.
Then push menu button 3, enter the
HR/BSA interface, input heart rate,
height, weight and the system
calculates SVI, CO, COI and BSA.

SVI:

Stroke volume index


(SV/BSA)
Cardiac output

CO:
l/min
COI:
EF:
BSA:

Cardiac outputCO/BSA
% Ejection Fraction
m2 Body surface area

15.3.5 Simpson
<Measured Parts>

4-VentricleFigure or 2-VentricleFigure

Papillary muscles horizontal position

<Measurement Method>
204

<Measurement Results>
LVLd:
Left ventricle long-axis length
cm [diastole]
LVLs:
Left ventricle long-axis length
cm [systole]
LVSAMVd:
Left ventricle short-axis area at
2
cm
mistral valve [diastole]
LVSAMVs:
Left ventricle short-axis area at
cm2 mistral valve[systole]
LVSAPMd:
Left ventricle short-axis area at
2
cm papillary muscles [diastole]
LVSAPMs:
Left ventricle short-axis area at
2
cm papillary muscles [systole]
HR:
bpm Heart rate
EDV: End diastolic volume
ml
ESV:
ml End systolic volume
SV:
ml Stroke volume
SVI:
Stroke volume index (SV/BSA
CO:
Cardiac output
l/min
COI:
Cardiac
output
index
CO/BSA
EF:
% Ejection Fraction
BSA:
m2 Body surface area

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

1.

2.
3.

Measure LVLd and LVLd, that is the length between the cardiac apex and the middle
point of mistral valve, by 11.1.2 Distance measurement method and the system
calculates EDV, ESV, SV and EF.
Measure LVSAMVd and LVSAMVd by 11.1.4 Trace Measurement Method. Then
measure LVSAPMd and LVSAPMs. The system calculates EDV, ESV, SV, and EF.
Then push menu button 3, enter the HR/BSA interface, input heart rate, height, weight
and the system calculates SVI, CO, COI, and BSA

15.4 LV-Function in B Mode and B/B Mode


15.4.1 LV-Pombo, LV-Teichholz and LV-Gibson
<Measured Parts>

<Measurement Method>
1. Measure IVSd, IVSs, LVIDd,
LVIDs, LVPWd, and LVPWs, by
11.1.2 Distance Measurement
Method
and
the
system
calculates EDV, ESV, SV, EF, FS,
and IVS/LVPW.
2. Then push menu button 3, enter
the HR/BSA interface, input heart
rate, height, weight and the
system calculates SVI, CO, COI,
and BSA.

<Measurement Results>
IVSd:
Intraventricular septum[diastole]
cm
LVIDd:
Left
ventricle
inner
diameter[diastole]
cm
LVPWd:
Left
ventricle
posterior
wall[diastole]
Cm
IVSs:
Intraventricular septum[systole]
cm
LVIDs:
Left
ventricle
inner
diameter[systole]
cm
LVPWs:
Left
ventricle
posterior
wall[systole]
cm
HR:
bpm Heart rate
EDV:
ml End diastolic volume
ESV:
ml End systolic volume
SV:
ml Stroke volume
SVI:
Stroke volume indexSV/BSA
CO:
Cardiac output
l/min
COI:
Cardiac output indexCO/BSA
EF:
% Ejection Fraction
FS:
% Shorten percentage relatively
IVS/LVPW:
IVS/LVPW ratio
2
BSA:
m Body surface area

205

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

15.5 B-LV Measurement in B Mode and B/B Mode


15.5.1 Long Axis

<Measured Parts>

<Measurement Results>
LVDd:
Left
ventricle
diameter[diastole]
cm
LADd:
Left
atrium
AOD
LVD
diameter[diastole]
cm
LAD
AODd:
Root of Aorta Diameter
diastole
<Measurement Method>
cm
Measure LVDd, LVDs, LADd, LADs, AODd
LADs:
Left
atrium
and AODs respectively by 11.1.2 Distance
diameter[systole]
Measurement method. The system then
cm
calculates the LA/AO ratio.
LADs:
Left
atrium
diameter[systole]
cm
AODs:
Aortic valve Diameter
(systole)
LA/AO:
LA/AO ratio

15.5.2 Wall L-Axis


<Measured Parts>

IVS

LVPW

<Measurement Method>
Measure IVSd, IVSs, LVPWd, LVPWs
respectively
by
11.1.2
Distance
Measurement Method. The system then
calculates IVS/LVPW ratio, IVSTF and
LVPWTF

206

<Measurement Results>
IVSd:
Intraventricular
septum[diastole]
cm
LVPWd:
Left ventricle posterior wall
[diastole]
cm
IVSs:
Intraventricular
septum[systole]
cm
LVPWs:
Left
ventricle
posterior
wall[systole]
cm
IVS/LVPW:
IVS/LVPW ratio
IVSTF:
Left
Ventricle
Space
Thickness percentage

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

%
LVPWTF:

Left Ventricle Posterior Wall


Thickness percentage
%

15.5.3 Short Axis


<Measured Parts>
MVA

Mitral valve horizontal


position
LVSLMV

Mitral valve
horizontal position

LVSAMV

Mitral valve horizontal


position
LVSAPM

Papillary muscles
horizontal position

<Measurement Results>
MVA:
Mitral valve area
2
cm
LVSAMVd:
Left ventricle short-axis area
2
cm at mistral valve[diastole]
LVSLMVd:
Left ventricle short-axis
cm length
at
mistral
valve[diastole]
LVSAMVs:
Left ventricle short-axis area
2
cm at mistral valve[systole]
LVSLMVs:
Left ventricle short-axis
cm length
at
mistral
valve[systole]
LVSAPMd:
Left ventricle short-axis area
2
cm at
papillary
muscles[diastole]
LVSAPMs:
Left ventricle short-axis area
2
cm at papillary muscles[systole]
Area EF:
Area of Ejection Fraction

<Measurement method>
1. Measure MVA, LVSAMVd, LVSAMVs, LVSAPMd and LVSAPMs by 11.1.4 Trace
Measurement Method.
2. Measure LVSLMVd and LVSLMVs by 11.1.2 Distance Measurement Method.
3. The system then calculates Area EF from LVSA.

15.5.4 Cardio-Apex
<Measured Parts>

<Measurement Results>
LVLAd:
Left
ventricle
area[diastole]
2
cm
LVLd:
Left
ventricle
length[diastole]
cm

long-axis

long-axis

207

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

LVLAs:
LVL

Left
ventricle
area[systole]

long-axis

cm2

LVLA

LVLs:

Left ventricle long-axis length


[systole]
cm

Area EF:

Area ejection fraction

4-VentricleFigure or 2-VentricleFigure

<Measurement Method>
1. Measure LVLAd and LVLAs by 11.1.4 Trace Measurement Method.
2. Measure the distance from the cardiac apex to the middle point of the mistral valve,
namely, LVLd and LVLs. The system then calculates Area EF from LVLA.

15.6 LV-Function Measurement in B/M Mode and M Mode


15.6.1 LV-Pombo, LV-Teichholz and LV-Gibson
<Measured Parts>

<Measurement Method>
1. Measure IVSd, IVSs, LVIDd, LVIDs
by 11.1.2 Distance Measurement
Method and the system calculates
EDV, ESV,SV, EF, and FS.
2. Measure ET by 11.3 Distance
Measurement in B/M mode and M
mode-Time
and
the
system
208

<Measurement Results>
IVSd:
Intraventricular
septum
thickness[diastole]
cm
LVIDd:
Left
ventricle
inner
diameter[diastole]
cm
LVPWd:
Left ventricle posterior wall
thickness [diastole]
cm
IVSs:
Intraventricular
septum
thickness[systole]
cm
LVIDs:
Left
ventricle
inner
diameter[systole]
cm
LVPWs:
Left ventricle posterior wall
thickness[systole]
cm
ET:
ms Ejection time
HR:
bpm Heart rate
LVM:
Left Ventricle Mass
EDV:
ml End diastolic volume
ESV:
ml End systolic volume
SV:
ml Stroke volume

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

3.

4.

5.

automatically calculates MVCF.


Measure HR by 11.3 Distance
Measurement in B/M Mode and M
Mode.
Then push menu button 3, enter the
HR/BSA interface and input height
and weight.
The system calculates SVI, CO,
COI, and BSA

SVI:
CO:

Stroke volume indexSV/BSA


Cardiac output
l/min

COI:
EF:
FS:
MVCF:

BSA:

Cardiac output indexCO/BSA


% Ejection fraction
% Shorten percentage relatively.
Acroteric
fibrous
tissue
decurtation average rate
cir/s
m2 Body surface area

15.7 Volume Measurement in B/M Mode and M Mode


15.7.1 MVMitral Valve
<Measured Parts>

<Measurement Results>
EPSS:
E-Point Separate Septum
cm
C-E:
Mitral Valve C-E amplitude
cm
C-A:
Mitral Valve C-A amplitude
cm
E-F SLP:
Mitral Valve Untread Speed
DDR
cm/s
LVOTD:
Left Ventricle Output Diameter
cm
HR:
bpm Heart rate
A/E:
C-A/C-E

<Measurement Method>
1. Measure EPSS by 11.1.2 Distance Measurement Method. Measure the C-E and C-A
distance, as well as LVOTD. The system calculates the A/E ratio.
2. Measure E-F SLP by 11.3 Distance Measurement in B/M and M Modes-Slope.
3. Measure heart rate by 11.3 distance measurement in B/M and M modes Heart Rate

15.7.2 AVAortic Valve


<Measured Parts>

<Measurement Results>
RVOTd:
Right
Ventricle
Diameter (diastole)
cm

Output

209

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

AODd:

Root of Aorta
diastole

Diameter

cm
LADd:

Left Atrium Diameter (diastole)


cm

RVOTs:

Right
Ventricle
Diameter (systole)

Output

cm
AODs:

Root of
(systole)

Aorta

Diameter

cm
LADs:

Left atrium diameter[systole]

cm
ms Ejection time
Aortic valve diameter
cm
HR: bpm
Heart Rate
LA/AO:
LA/AO ratio
ET:
AVD:

<Measurement Method>
1. Measure RVO(d,s), TAOD(d,s) , LAD(d,s) by 11.1.2 Distance Measurement Result.
2. Measure ET by 11.3 Distance Measurement in the B/M and M modes Time.
3. Measure heart rate by 11.3 Distance Measurement in the B/M and M Modes-Heart
Rate.

15.7.3 TVTricuspid Valve


<Measured Parts>

210

<Measurement Results>
E-F SLP:
Tricuspid
Valve
Set-free
Speed
cm/s
C-E:
Tricuspid
Valve
C-E
amplitude
cm
C-A:
Tricuspid Valve C-A amplitude
cm
D-E SLP:
Tricuspid
Valve
Set-free
Speed
cm/s
D-E:
Tricuspid
Valve
D-E
amplitude
cm
HR:
bpm Heart rate

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

A/E:

C-A/C-E

<Measurement Method>
1. Measure all items on the image of left ventricle tricuspid valve. Measure E-F SLP, D-E
SLP, and HR by 11.3 Distance Measurement in the B/M and M modes; Measure C-E,
C-A, and D-E by 11.2 Distance Measurement in the B and B/B Modes. The system
would calculate A/E, that is, the C-A C-E ratio.
2. Measure E-F SLP by 11.3 Distance Measurement in the B/M Mode and M Mode-Slope.
3. Measure C-E, C-A by 11.1.2 Distance Measurement Method and the system calculate
the A/E ratio.
4. Measure D-E SLP by 11.3 Distance Measurement in the B/M Mode and M Mode-Slope.
5. Measure heart rate by 11.3 Distance Measurement in the B/M Mode and M Mode-Heart
Rate.

15.7.4 PVPulmonary Valve


<Measured Parts>

<Measurement Results>
A WAVE:
A Wave amplitude
cm
E-F SLP:
Pulmonary Valve Set-free
Speed
cm/s
B-C SLP:
Pulmonary Valve Untread
Speed
cm/s
B-C:
Pulmonary
Valve
B-C
amplitude
cm
HR:
bpm Heart Rate

<Measurement Method>
1. Measure AW/AVE by 11.1.2 Distance Measurement Method.
2. Measure E-F SLP by 11.3 Distance Measurement in the B/M Mode and M Mode
Slope.
3. Measure B-C SLP by 11.3 Distance Measurement in the B/M Mode and M Mode-Slope.
4. Measure B-C by 11.1.2 Distance Measurement Method.
5. Measure heart rate by 11.3 Distance Measurement in the B/M Mode and M Mode-Heart
Rate

211

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

15.8 LV-Volume Measurement in B/M Mode and M Mode


15.8.1 Pombo, Teichholz and Gibson

<Measured Parts>

<Measurement Method>
1. Measure IVSd, IVSs, LVIDd, LVIDs,
LVPWd, and LVPWs by 11.1.2
Distance Measurement Method and
the system calculates EDV, ESV,
SV, EF and FS.
2. Measure ET by 11.3 Distance
Measurement in B/M and M Modes Time. The system then calculates
MVCF.
3. Measure heart rate by 11.3
Distance Measurement in the B/M
and M Modes-Heart Rate.
4. Then push menu button 3, enter the
HR/BSA interface, input height,
weight and the system calculates
SVI, CO, COI and BSA.

212

<Measurement Results>
IVSd:
Intraventricular
septum[diastole]
cm
LVIDd:
Left ventricle inner
diameter[diastole]
cm
LVPWd:
Left
ventricle
posterior
wall
thickness[diastole]
cm
IVSs:
Intraventricular
septum[systole]
cm
LVIDs:
Left ventricle inner
diameter[systole]
cm
LVPWs:
Left ventricle
posterior
wall
thickness[systole]
cm
ET: Ejection time
ms
HR: Heart rate
bpm
LVM:
Left Ventricle Mass
EDV: End diastolic volume
ml
ESV: End systolic volume
ml
SV: Stroke volume
ml
SVI:
Stroke volume index
SV/BSA
CO:
Cardiac output
l/min
COI:
Cardiac output index
CO/BSA

Chapter 15 Cardiology Measurement

EF:
FS:

% Ejection fraction
% Shorten percentage
relatively
MVCF:
Acroteric
fibrous
tissue
decurtation
average rate
cir/s

213

Chapter 16 Measurement & Report

Chapter 16 Measurement Report

Reminder

If the equipment is connected to a network printer, the speed of


accessing the Measurement Report interface will slow down because
of the need to search network.

Figure 16-1 Measurement Report


1Patient ID: The patient ID number.
2Patient Name: The patient name.
3The current time: The time when the Report is opened.
4Age: The patient age.
5Birth Date: The patient birth date.
6Obstetric: The patient obstetric measurement report. Refer to 16.1 Obstetrics
214

Chapter 16 Measurement & Report

Measurement Report for details.


7Gynecologic: The patient gynecologic measurement report. Refer to 16.2
Gynecology Measurement Report for details.
8Cardiac: The patient cardiac measurement report. Refer to 16.3 Cardiac
Report for details.
9Urology & Others: The patient urology measurement report. Refer to 16.4
Urology Measurement Report for details.
10
Menu
1 Printe to PC Printer
2 Data Save
6 Exit
1 Print to PC Printer: After setting printer in preset, push 1 Print to PC Printer to
print the current screen. This menu doesnt show up if no preset has been done.
2 Data Save: After measuring and calculating the corresponding parts, enter
Report to display measurement data. Push 2 Data Save to save the measurement
data.
6 Exit: Exit Measurement Report.

Reminder

Patient ID, Patient Name, Birth Date and Age are created in the New
Patient interface. Refer to Chapter 8 New Patient. All these
information can be modified in Patient Data. Refer to 10.5 Patient
Information for details.

16.1 Obstetrics Report


Click Obstetricin the Measurement Report interface to switch from other report
interfaces to obstetric measurement report interface. Shown in the below Figure:

215

Chapter 16 Measurement & Report

Figure 16.1-1 Measurement Report Obstetric


1List of Fetal Measurement Value and GA Estimation Result
Fetal ParaFetal Parameter: Parameter for fetal measurement.
Average: The average value of fetal measurement results.
GAGestation Age: The gestation period estimated from measurement
results.
EDC: The expected date of childbirth estimated from measurement results.
Rank: The standard deviation.
Age Table: The table which is used to estimate gestation period by
measured values.
Growth Table: The table used to draw the fetal growth curve corresponding
to measured values.
Value1 3: The average of three groups of measured values for one
parameter is used to estimate gestation period.
2Estimate EDC from LMP and Estimate Gestation Period from Measured
216

Chapter 16 Measurement & Report

Value

LMP: Last Menstrual Period


DGA:Gestation Age calculated from Last Menstrual Period
LMP EDC: Estimated Date of Childbirth calculated from Last Menstrual
Period

GA by U/S: The average of gestation period estimated from each measured


value (equivalent to the average GA value in (1) Fetal Measurement Value
and Gestation Age Estimation Result Table) .
3 Gestation Age Curve
The gestation age curve is drawn according to the Age Table and the
measured parameters from any row of results in 1Fetal Measurement
Value and Gestation Age Estimation Result Table.
Ordinate: the measured value of parameters. The unit of length measurement
is mm. The unit of area measurement is mm2.
Abscissa: the gestation period of the fetus. Unit week.
The gestation age curve (deviation value): The corresponding relationship
between the measured values of parameters and the deviation of fetal
gestation period, this is expressed in a curve.
The gestation age curve (standard value): The corresponding relationship
between the measured values of parameters and the standard fetal
gestation period, which is expressed in a curve.
Mark of measured value: Mark the measured value in the coordinate system
and the ordinate of the mark is the measured value.

4Gestation Age Curve


The gestation curve is drawn according to the Growth Table and the measured
parameters which is randomly selected from any row of results in the Fetal
Measurement Value and Gestation Age Estimation Result Table.

217

Chapter 16 Measurement & Report

Ordinate: Measured value of parameters. The unit is mm for length


measurement. The unit is mm2 for area measurement.
Abscissa: the gestation period of the fetus. Unit week.
The fetal growth curve (deviation value): The corresponding relationship
between each gestation period and the deviation of the parameter value,
which is expressed in a curve.
The fetal growth curve (standard value): The corresponding relationship
between each gestation period and the standard value of the parameter,
which is expressed in a curve.
Mark of the measured value: Mark the measured value in the coordinate
system and the ordinate of the mark is the measurement value.
5Biophysical Score
Click Biophysical Scorein the Measurement Report interface and the
Calculation Biophysical Score dialog box is opened, shown in the below Figure:

218

Chapter 16 Measurement & Report

Evaluation value of 2, 0 or NA is be assigned to each item. Select a proper value


for each item and click OK to exit the Calculation Biophysical Score dialog
box. The calculated result will be shown above the Biophysical Scorebutton
on the Measurement Report interface, e.g.,

. If all

evaluation items score 2, the maximum total score is 10. NA is 0.


Click OKto exit the Calculation Biophysical Score dialog box directly without
calculating the biophysical effect.
This grading standard follows the Manning rules.
6AFI-Amniotic Fluid Index
There is an AFI list in the lower part of the Measurement Report interface,
shown in the below Figure:

Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 refers to the amniotic fluid depth of the four quadrants of the
uterus respectively. AFIQ1Q2Q3Q4.

16.2 Gynecologic Measurement Report


Click Gynecologicin the Measurement Report interface to switch from other report
interfaces to the gynecologic measurement report interface, shown in the below Figure:
219

Chapter 16 Measurement & Report

Figure 16.2-1 Measurement Report - Gynecologic


1Uterus:
Length:Length of Uterus
Width:Width of Uterus
Height:Height of Uterus
2Cervix:
Length:Length of Cervix
3:Endometrium
Thickness:Thickness of Endometrium
4Left Ovary:
220

Chapter 16 Measurement & Report

Length:Length of Left Ovary


Width:Width of Left Ovary
Height:Height of Left Ovary
ml:Volume of Left Ovary

5Right Ovary:
Length:Length of Right Ovary
Width:Width of Right Ovary
Height:Height of Right Ovary
ml:Volume of Right Ovary
6L-Follicle:
Diameter:Diameter of L-Follicle
Volume:Volume of L-Follicle
Maximum five groups of measurement values and their calculated results can be
saved at the same time.
7R-Follicle:
Diameter:Diameter of R-Follicle
Volume:Volume of R-Follicle
Maximum five groups of measurement values and their calculated results can be
saved at the same time.

16.3 Cardiac Measurement Report


Click Cardiacin the Measurement Report interface to switch from other report
interfaces to the cardiac measurement report interface, shown in the below Figure:

221

Chapter 16 Measurement & Report

Figure 16.3-1 Measurement Report Gynecologic


1Measured Item:
List the cardiac measurement menu in B Mode (including B Mode and B/B Mode) and
B/M Mode (including B/M Mode and M Mode) in the tree structure, which correspond to
the menu in the cardiac measurement interface one by one.

222

Chapter 16 Measurement & Report

Figure 16.3-2 Cardiac Measurement Items


to open the sub-items in the menu; Click
to hide the sub-items in the
Click
menu.
Please refer to (3) List of Measurement Menu, Measured Value and Calculated Value
for details.
2Measurement result display:
List the measurement results in B Mode (including B Mode and B/B Mode) and B/M
Mode (including B/M Mode and M Mode) in table format, which correspond to the
results in the cardiac measurement interface one by one.

223

Chapter 16 Measurement & Report

Figure 16.3-2 Cardiac measurement result display


Please refer to (3) Measurement Menu, Measured Value and Calculated Value for
details.
3Measurement menu, measured value and calculated value
Table 16.3-1 Measurement menu, measured value and calculated value in B mode and B/B
mode

Class

Menu

Item
Measurement Item

Pombo
Teichholz

LVIDdLVIDs

Gibson
LV-Volume

S.Plane ELP.
LVLAdLVLAsLVLdLVL s
(Single Plane Ellipse)

Calculated Item
EDVESVSVSVICO
COIEFFSBSA

EDVESVSVSVICO
LVLAdLVLAsLVSAMVd
COIEFBSA
Biplane ELP.
LVSAMVs LVSLMVd
Biplane Ellipse
LVSLMVs

224

Chapter 16 Measurement & Report

Bullet

LVSAPMdLVSAPMsLVLd
LVLs

Simpson

LVLd LVLs LVSAMVd


LVSAMVs LVSLMVd
LVSLMVs

LV-Pombo
( Left Ventricle
Pombo)
LV-Function

LV-Teich.
( Left Ventricle
Teichholz)

EDVESVSVSVICO
TVSdTVSsLVIDdLVIDs
COI EF FS BSA
LVPWd LVPWs
IVS/LVPW

LV-Gibson
( Left Ventricle
Gibson )
Long Axis

B-LV

Wall L-Axis
(Wall Long Axis)

LVDd LVDs, LADd LADs,


LA/AO
AODd AODs
TVSd
TVPW s

TVSs, TVPWd

IVS/LVPW, IVSTF, LVPWTF

Short Axits

MVA, LVSLMVd LVSLMVs,


Area EF
LVSAMVd LVSAMVs

Cardio-Apex

LVLAdLVLAs, LVLd LVL s Area EF

225

Chapter 16 Measurement & Report

Table 16.3-2
M mode

Class

Measurement menu, measured value and calculated value in B/M mode and

Menu

Item
Measurement Item

Calculate Item

LV-Pombo
( Left Ventricle
Pombo)
LV-Function

LV-Teich.
( Left Ventricle
Teichholz)

TVSdTVSsLVIDd LVIDsEDVESVSVSVICO
LVPWd LVPWs
COIEFFSBSA MVCF

LV-Gibson
( Left Ventricle
Gibson )
MV
Mitral Valve

EPSS
C-E
C-A
E-F
LVOTD
HR

A/E

AV
Aortic Valve

RVOTd RVOTs AODd


AODsLADdLADsETAVD
HR

LA/AO

Valve

E-F SLP C-E C-A D-E


TV
Tricuspid Value SLEPD-EHR

A/E

A WAVE E-F SLP B-C


PV
Pulmonic Valve SLEPB-CHR
Pombo
B-LV

Teichholz

LVIDdLVIDs

Gibson

EDVESVSVSVICO
COIEFFSBSA

16.4 Urology Measurement Report


Click Urology & Othersin the Measurement Report interface to switch from other
report interfaces to the urology measurement report interface, shown in the below
Figure:

226

Chapter 16 Measurement & Report

Figure 16.4-1 Urology & Others Measurement Report


1Urology:
List the results of Urology Measurement in table format, which correspond to the
measurement results in the Urology Measurement interface one by one.
Prostate V.Prostate Volume:
D1,D2,D3:Three Diameters of ProstateLength,Width,Height,Unit mm.
Volume:Volume of Prostate,Unit ml.
Serum PSA:Serum Value of PSA,Unit ng/ml.
Pred. PSAPredicted PSA:Predicted PSA level by transitional zone
227

Chapter 16 Measurement & Report

volume),Unit ng.
PSA Dens.Prostate Specific Antigen Density:
Trans. Zone V.Transitional Zone Prostate Volume:
Diameters
of
Transitional
Zone
DA,,DB,DC:Three
Length,Width,Height,Unit mm.
Volume:Volume of Transitional Zone,Unit ml.
T.Zone PSA:Predicted PSA level by transitional zone volume,Unit ng.
Pred. PSAPredicted PSA:Predicted PSA level by transitional zone
volume,Unit ng.
Bladder V.Bladder Volume:
D1,D2,D3:Three Diameters of BladderLength,Width,Height,Unit mm.
Volume:Volume of Bladder,Unit ml.
Urine V.Urine Value:
D1,D2,D3:Three Diameters of UrineLength,Width,Height,Unit mm.
Volume:Volume of Urine,Unit ml.
2HIPJ. Angle:
List the results of HIPJ. Angle in table format, which correspond to the
measurement results in the HIPJ. Angle Measurement interface one by one.
Alpha:Bony roof angle,Unit degree.
Beta:Cartilage roof angle,Unit ml.
Type:Hip Types.The hip is classified into one of four main types according
to Graf's classification.
3Slice Volume:
List the results of Slice Volume in table format, which correspond to the
measurement results in the Slice Volume Measurement interface one by one.
Pitch:Pitch of every Slice,Unit mm.
Volume:Volume of Slice,Unit ml.
PCAR:Ratio of the area of a slice to that of a hypothetical circle.
PCAR=S/ S
S is the area of a slice. S is the area of a hypothetical circle. The
circumference of the slice is equal to that of the hypothetical circle.
Area:Area of every Slice,Unit cm2.
Girth:Girth of every Slice,Unit cm.

228

Chapter 17 Marks

Chapter 17 Marks
1All marks are usable in real-time and freeze state.
2All marks are usable in B, B/B, and B/M modes.
3Body marks are kept on saved images.

17.1 Text
17.1.1 Display and Input Text
Press Text. The cursor shows up in the image area and the word Text Mark
shows up in the bottom left of the screen, shown in the below Figure.

Figure 17.1.1-1

Use trackball or arrow key

to move cursor.

Input text on the alphanumeric keyboard.

Push menu button 1-5 to input the corresponding text. Please refer to 17.1.4 Text
Menu for details.
229

Chapter 17 Marks

Caps Lock: Capital letter could be inputed when Caps Lock is attived. Add
small letter could be inputed when Caps Lock is not attived.
Shift :Keep pressing Shift to input capitalized letters when Caps Lock is
not attived. Keep pressing Shift to input small letter when Caps Lock is attived.

17.1.2 Delete text


(1)

Delete text one by one


Move the cursor to the right of the text to be deleted and press

(2)

in the

alphanumeric key zone to delete text one by one.


Delete all text
Press Clear Text to delete all text on the interface.
Press Clear Allto delete all marks, measurement tracks and measurement results on the
interface.

17.1.3 Exit Text


Exit the text input function by any operation below:
Presstextagain.
Switch to another menu (except FreezeGuidePanZoomTHIGain
Frequency).
Switch to B, B/B or B/M mode.
Existing text will disappear at the time of exiting.

17.1.4 Text Menu


Press Textand a group of menu keys pop up in the lower part of the screen.
1 Liver
2 Gallbladder
3 Pancreas
4 Spleen
5 Stomach
6 Next
Push button 6
1A
2B
3C
4D
5E
6 Previous
Push the corresponding menu button to access the preset text. Push menu button 6 to enter
the next menu. Push button 6 again to return to the main menu.
The content of text is the same as settings in Edit Data-Annotation. Please refer to 8.7.5
Edit Data Annotation.
Below are some abbreviated words used to mark different diagnostic regions:

230

Chapter 17 Marks

Abbreviation -1
Diagnostic
Region
Abdominal

Sort
Location

Clinical

Common

Abbreviated
Name

Formal Name

LIVER

Liver

RHV

Right Hepatic Vein

MHV

Middle Hepatic Vein

LHV

Left Hepatic Vein

PV

Portal Vein

IVC

Inferior Vera Cava

AO

Aorta

GB

Gallbladder

CBD

Common Bile Duct

BD

Bile Duct

SMA

Superior Mesenteric Artery

SMV

Superior Mesenteric Vein

CA

Celiac Artery

PANCREAS

Pancreas

MPD

Main Pancreatic Duct

SPLEEN

Spleen

SPA

Splenetic Artery

SPV

Splenetic Vein

KIDNEY

Kidney

BLADDER

Bladder

PROSTATE

Prostate

UTERUS

Uterus

STOMACH

Stomach

CYST

Cyst

MASS

Mass

TUMOR

Tumor

META

Metastasis

HCC

Hepato Cellular Carcinoma

FATTY

Fatty

ABSCESS

Abscess

ASCITES

Ascites

POLYP

Polyp

SHADOW

Ultrasound Shadow

STONE

Stone

R-

Right

L-

Left

SITTING

Sitting

231

Chapter 17 Marks

Abbreviation -2
Diagnostic
Region
Cardiac

232

Sort
Location

Abbreviated
Name

Formal Name

LA

Left Atrium

LV

Left Ventricle

IVS

Interventricular Septum

LVPW

Posterior Wall of Left Ventricle

RA

Right Atrium

RV

Right Ventricle

MV

Mitral Valve

AML

Anterior Mitral Leaflet

PML

Posterior Mitral Leaflet

AV

Aorta Valve

AO

Aorta

AAO

Ascending Aorta

DAO

Descending Aorta

ARCH

Aortic Arch

RCA

Right Coronary Artery

LCA

Left Coronary Artery

LMT

Left Main Truck Coronary Artery

LAD

Left Anterior Descending

LCX

Left Circumflex

PA

Pulmonary Artery

PV

Pulmonary Valve

TV

Tricuspid Valve

LVOT

Left Ventricular Outflow Tract

LVIT

Left Ventricular Inflow Tract

RVOT

Right Ventricular Outflow Tract

RVIT

Right Ventricular Inflow Tract

NCC

Non-Coronary Cusp

LCC

Light Coronary Cusp

RCC

Right Coronary Cusp

LAA

Left Atria Appendage

SVC

Superior Vena Cava

IVC

Inferior Vena Cava

Chapter 17 Marks

Abbreviation -3
Diagnostic
Region
Cardiac

Sort
Clinical

Stress

Common

Abbreviated
Name

Formal Name

EFFUSION

Effusion

VEG

Vegetation

SAM

Systolic Anterior Motion

THROMBUS

Thrombus

MYXOMA

Myxoma

VSD

Ventricular Septal Defect

ASD

Atria Septal Defect

PDA

Patent Ductus Arteriosus

HYPO

Hypo

AKINESIS

Akinesis

ANEURYSN

Aneurysm

ENTRY

Entry

REENTR

Reentry

TL

True Lumen

FL

False Lumen

IF

Intimal Flap

TUMOR

Tumor

REST

Rest

EXERCISE

Exercise

L-DOSE

Low Dose

H-DOSE

High Dose

PEAK

Peak Dose

POST

Post Dose

RECOVERY

Recovery

DIASTOLE

Diastole

SYSTOLE

Systole

TRANS

Transverse

LONGI

Longitudinal

AWAY

Away

TOWARD

Toward

PRE-OPE

Pre Operation

POST-OPE

Post Operation

233

Chapter 17 Marks

Abbreviation-4
Diagnostic
Region
Vascular

234

Sort
Location

Abbreviated
Name

Formal Name

RCCA

Right Common Carotid Artery

LCCA

Left Common Carotid Artery

ICA

Internal Carotid Artery

ECA

External Carotid Artery

BIF

Bifurcation

RCCV

Right Common Carotid Vein

LCCV

Left Common Carotid Vein

ICV

Internal Carotid Vein

ECV

External Carotid Vein

JUG-A

Jugular Vein

VERT-A

Vertebra Artery

S-TH-A

Superior Thyroid Artery

I-TH-A

Inferior Thyroid Artery

SUBCL-A

Subclavian Artery

SUBCL-V

Subclavian Vein

AX-A

Axillery Artery

AX-V

Axillery Vein

BRACH-A

Brachial Artery

BRACH-V

Brachial Vein

CEPH-V

Cephalic Vein

BAS-V

Basilic Vein

RAD-A

Radial Artery

UL-A

Ulner Artery

DIGITAL

Digital

FEMORAL

Femoral

CFA

Common Femoral Artery

CFV

Common Femoral Vein

GSV

Greater Saphenous Vein

POP-A

Popliteal Artery

POP-V

Popliteal Vein

PER-A

Peroneal Artery

PER-V

Peroneal Vein

Chapter 17 Marks

Abbreviation -5
Diagnostic
Region
Vascular

Sort
Location

Clinical

Common

Abbreviated
Name

Formal Name

ATA

Anterior Tibial Artery

ATV

Anterior Tibial Vein

PTA

Posterior Tibial Artery

PTV

Posterior Tibial Vein

PLAQUE

Plaque

ATHEROMA

Atheroma

THROMBUS

Thrombus

R-

Right-

L-

Left-

ARTERY

Artery

VEIN

Vein

SUPERIOR

Superior

INFERIOR

Inferior

ANTERIOR

Anterior

POSTERIOR

Posterior

COMMON

Common

INTERNAL

Internal

EXTERNAL

External

DISTAL

Distal

DIASTOLE

Diastole

SYSTOLE

Systole

235

Chapter 17 Marks

Abbreviation -6
Diagnostic
Region
Ob/Gyn

Sort
Location

Clinical

Common

236

Abbreviated
Name

Formal Name

UTERUS

Uterus

DOUGLAS

Douglas

OVARY

Ovary

FOLLICLE

Follicle

GS

Gestational Sac

YOLK-SAC

Yolk Sac

FETUS

Fetus

PLANCENTA

Placenta

BLADDER

Bladder

UM-ARTERY

Umbilical Artery

UM-VEIN

Umbilical Vein

UT-ARTERY

Uterine

SPINE

Spine

STOMACH

Stomach

KIDNEY

Kidey

CORD

umbilical Cord

CYST

Cyst

TUMOR

Tumor

MYOMA

Myoma

CHOCOLATE

Chocolate Cyst

DERMOID

Dermoid

IUD

Intrauterine Device

MOLE

Mole

ECTOPIC

Ectopic Pregnancy

IUGR

Intrauterine Growth Retardation

TWINA

Twin A

TWINB

Twin B

R-

Right-

L-

Left-

ANTERIOR

Anterior

POSTERIOR

Posterior

CERVIX

Cervix

FUNDUS

Fundus

Chapter 17 Marks

Abbreviation -7
Diagnostic
Region
Urology

Sort

Abbreviated
Name

Formal Name

Location

PROSTATE

Prostate

DUCT

Duct

SV

Seminal Vesicle

EJ-DUCT

Ejaculation Duct

TESTIS

Testis

SCROTUM

Scrotum

PENIS

Penis

URETHRA

Urethra

BLADDER

Bladder

PB

Public Bone

PC

Prostatic Cancer

BPH

Benign Prostate
Hypertrophy

TUMOR

Tumor

MASS

Mass

CYST

Cyst

AMYLOID

Amyloid

R-

Right-

L-

Left-

ANTERIOR

Anterior

POSTERIOR

Posterior

SAG

Sagital

TRANS

Transverse

PRE-OPE

Pre Operation

POST-OPE

Post Operation

Clinical

Common

237

Chapter 17 Marks

Abbreviation -8
Diagnostic
Region
Breast

Sort
Location

Clinical

Common

238

Abbreviated
Name

Formal Name

MAMMA

Mammary Gland

COOPER

Suspensory Of Cooper

SKIN

Skin

FAT

Fat

RIB

Rib

NIPPLE

Nipple

LN

Lymph Node

DUCT

Duct

PM

Pectoral Muscle

TUMOR

Tumor

MASS

Mass

CYST

Cyst

MASTOPATH
Y

Mastopathy

FA

Fibroadenoma

PAPILLOMA

Papilloma

LYMPHOMA

Lymphoma

LIPOMA

Lipoma

R-

Right-

L-

Left-

PRE-OPE

Pre Operation

POST-OPE

Post Operation

Chapter 17 Marks

Abbreviation -9
Diagnostic
Region
Thyroid

Sort
Location

Clinical

Common

Abbreviated
Name

Formal Name

THYROID

Thyroid

TRACHEA

Trachea

THYROID-A

Thyroid Artery

THYROID-V

Thyroid Vein

RCC

Right Commom Carotid Artery

LCCA

Left Commom Carotid


Artery

ICV

Internal Carotid Vein

ESOPHAGUS

Esophagus

TUMOR

Tumor

MASS

Mass

CYST

Cyst

BASEDOW

Basedow disease

HASHIMOTO

Hashimoto disease

GOITER

Goiter

AMYLOID

Amyloid Goiter

R-

Right

L-

Left

SUPERIOR

Superior

MIDDLE

Middle

INFERIOR

Inferior

LOBE

Lobe

17.2 Body Mark


Press Body Markand the word Body Mark is displayed in the bottom left of the
screen, shown in the below Figure.

239

Chapter 17 Marks

Figure 17.2.1-1 Body Mark

Shown in the icon on the left, the body mark and the probe mark

are displayed in the image area. Positions of the marks can be changed
by rolling the trackball. The direction of the probe mark can be changed

through turning

17.2.1 Display of Body Mark


Body marks are divided into groups for different body parts. When loading one
application mode through Fucnkey combination , press Body Markcontinuously
and body mark 1~4 in one group will be displayed one by one. The operator needs to
preset as to which group of bodymarks is to be displayed (refer to 8.7.4 Edit
Data-Measurement). Bodymark 1~4 within the specific group also needs to be preset
(refer to 8.7.3 Edit Data-Body Mark.
Press Body Markfor the first time to show the first body mark. Press Body Mark
again to display the next body mark. When the last body mark is displayed, press Body
Markagain to hide body marks, shown in the below Figure:

17.2.2-1 Order of Body Mark Display


240

Chapter 17 Marks

Except for selecting body marks by continuously pressing Body


Mark, body marks can also be selected by opening the Body Mark
List interface through menu.

17.2.2 Move body mark and probe mark


Move body mark
If the current cursor is shown as

, roll the trackball to move the body mark. Body

marks can be moved within the whole image area while the position of the probe mark

is fixed. At this time, pressSetor push menu button 5, the mark

disappears

and Move Body Mark is switched into Move Probe Mark, as shown in Figure 17.2.2-1.
Move probe mark
If the current cursor is not shown as

, roll the trackball to move the probe mark

The moving range is the rectangular zone which the body mark is in. At this time, press
Setor push menu button 5, the cursor turns into

, and Move Body Mark is

switched into Move Probe Mark, as shown in Figure 17.2.2-1.

Figure 17.2.2-1 Move Mark

17.2.3 Adjust angle of probe mark

Adjust the angle of the probe mark in the body mark through turning

Turn
clockwise, the probe mark is rotated clockwise. Turn
probe mark is rotated anticlockwise.

anticlockwise and the

17.2.4 Exit Body Mark


Exit by the method shown in Figure17.2.1-1.
Switch to another menu.
Switch into B, B/B or B/M mode.

PressBody Markagain.

241

Chapter 17 Marks

17.2.5 Body Mark Menu


Press Body Markand a group of menu keys are displayed on the lower part of the

1)

screen.
1 Mark List
1 Mark List, body mark list.
17.2.4

5 Mark Move
6 Mark Off
Push menu button 1 and a new interface shows as Figure

Figure 17.2.4 Bodymark List


On the left are 10 groups of body parts. Click any of them and the corresponding body
marks show on the right. Select the desired body mark, then click OKto exit the Body
Mark List interface. The selected body mark is shown in the image area.
2)

5 Mark Move
Move Body Mark and Move Probe Mark are interchangeable. Pusing menu button 5 is

equivalent to pressing
3)

242

. Refer to 17.2.2 Move Body Mark and Probe Mark for

details.
6 Mark Off
Push menu button 6, finish body mark adjustment and exit the menu. The body mark

Chapter 17 Marks

remains in the image area.

17.3 Arrow
17.3.1 Display and Input Arrow Marks
Press
and the icon
shows in the image area.
Simultaneously, the word Arrow Mark is displayed in the bottom left of the
screen.
Arrow marks can be moved with the trackball.

Press

Turn

to input arrow marks.

to change the direction of the arrow. The rotating direction of the arrow is the

same as that of

17.3.2 Delete Arrow Mark


1 Delete arrow marks one by one
Press Nextto cancel the previously set arrow marks one by one.
2 Delete all arrow marks
Press Clear All to delete all marks, measurement tracks and measurement results on
the interface.

17.3.3 Exit Arrow Mark


Perform any of the below operations to ext input arrow mark:
again.
Press
Switch into another menu.
Switch into to B, B/B or B/M mode.
Existing arrow marks remain after the exit.

243

Chapter 18 Common Questions

Chapter 18 Common Questions


18.1 Some facility failures and eliminate methods
We summarized the common failures and eliminate methods as follows :
ordinal
Failure phenomenon
number
Opened the power
switches, power light
does not shine, the site
1
shows no signal, no
equipment functioning
voice.

Excluded methods
Inspection supply voltage;
Inspection power lines and the probe;
Inspection fusing tube whether burned-out;
Inspection the brightness adjustment turn Knob of monitors.

Inspection electricity supply, whether by other


equipment strike fire interference;
The screen is disrupted environmental inspection of the fields
by intermittent stripe
surrounding machine whether electromagnetic
and snowflake-shaped.
interference;
Inspection of the machine and probe power
plugs, sockets contacts are good.
No
information
in
Adjust TGC, GAIN
screen,
but
the
Adjust displays brightness and contrast
equipment
has
gradient;
functioning sound ;
Clean display surface (dry, soft dishcloth being
Monitor screen image
polished monitor screen).
show unclearly.
Switch on the machine,
There is much dust in the inner of
the image are normal
air-compressors, clear it with brush.
but the air-compressors
Maybe air-compressors is damaged, change it.
are not.

Note Instead of the fusing tube


Screw off the fusing tube cap in counter-clockwise direction, taking fusing tube, and
screw down the fusing tube cap in clockwise after changing. The standards of fusing
tube: 520rating: 10A/250V.

18.2 Other functions


Installed in the system default part, the system will use after installation.
Withdraw from the automatic freezing by "Freeze" button

244

Chapter 18 Common Questions

Withdraw from the screen protection by trackball

18.3 Puncture guide lines


18.3.1 Guide line image can not coincide with puncture needles
Guide line image can not coincide with puncture needles, and this is perfectly normal,
since invasive aircraft is mechanical equipment, and often have to use tear, will inevitably
lead to image with guide lines do not coincide. Can adjust the puncture needle
puncture-angle, let image coincide with the guide line, or parallel.
However, in actual use, or can not coincide in general, exist a error with 1.5 mm,
please try to regulate this, so that image and guide lines parallel.

18.3.2 Guide line direction


Guide line direction is immutable, but it can conform to habits through on turnover, or
turnover functional in screen.

18.4 Others
18.4.1 Customer Service Center
If there is some requirements, please contact Customer Service Center of Teknova
Medical Systems Limited.
Teknova Medical Systems Limited
Address: Teknova Building, 2 Yongjie North Road, Haidian, Beijing 100094, China
Service Hotline: 86-10-57682244
Homepage: http://www.teknova.cn/en
E-mail: international@teknova.cn

18.4.2 Note
Companies have retained the right to modify product design and specifications, if any,
not otherwise notice.
Photo printing process leading to the specification and the emergence of a physical
distinction is kind prevail.

245

Appendix

Appendix
Appendix A Obstetrics Measurement Reference
Measurement

Table

Valid Range

1.BPD
Age Table

HAD84

12w2d
41w0d

to

Hadlock,E,F.P.,et.al.:Estimating Fetal Age:


Computer Assisted of Multiple Fetal
Growth Parameters. Radiology.152:499,1984

2.BPD
Growth Table

HAD84

12w0d
40w0d

to

Hadlock,E,F.P.,et.al.:Estimating Fetal Age:


Computer Assisted of Multiple Fetal
Growth Parameters. Radiology.152:499,1984

3.BPD
Age Table

SABB78

14w0d
40w0d

to

Sabbagha,R E., et.al.:Standardization of


Sonar
Cephalometry and Gestational Age. Obstet.
Gynecol.52:402,1978.

4.HC
Age Table

HAD84

12w2d
41w4d

to

Hadlock,F.P.,et.al.: Estimating Fetal Age:


comptuter-Assisted Analysis of Multiple Fetal
Growth parameters. Radiology.152:499,1984

5.HC
Growth Table

HAD84

12w0d
40w0d

to

Hadlock,F.P.,et.al.: Estimating Fetal Age:


comptuter-Assisted Analysis of Multiple Fetal
Growth parameters. Radiology.152:499,1984

6.AC
Age Table

HAD84

12w5d
42w0d

to

Hadlock,F.P.,et.al.: Estimating Fetal Age:


comptuter-Assisted Analysis of Multiple Fetal
Growth parameters. Radiology.152:499,1984

7.AC
Growth Table

HAD84

12w0d
40w0d

to

Hadlock,F.P.,et.al.: Estimating Fetal Age:


comptuter-Assisted Analysis of Multiple Fetal
Growth parameters. Radiology.152:499,1984

8.FL
Growth Table

HAD84

12w0d
40w0d

to

Hadlock,F.P.,et.al.: Estimating Fetal Age:


comptuter-Assisted Analysis of Multiple Fetal
Growth parameters. Radiology.152:499,1984

9.OFL
Age Table

HAD82

12w6d
40w3d

to

Hadlock,F.P.,et.al.: Fetal Femur length as a


predictor of Menstrual Age. Sonographically
Measured.
Am.J.Roentgenology 138:875,May 1982.

10.FL
Age Table

JEAN84

12w4d
40w0d

to

Jeantry,P.,et.al.: Estimation of gestational age


from measurements of fetal long bones. J
Ultrasound Med.3:75-79,1984

11. FL
Growth Table

JEAN83

12w0d
40w0d

to

Jeanty,et.al. : Obstetricl Ultrasound New York,


McGraw-Hill,1983

246

Reference

Appendix

12.CRL
Age Table

ROB75

6w2d

to 14w0d

Robinson,H.P.,et.al.:A Critical Evaluation of


Sonar Crown-Rump LengthMeasurements.
Br.J.Obstet.Gynecol.82:702,1975

13.GS
Age Table

HEL69

5w3d

to

12w1d

Hellman,LM,et.al. :Growth and dvelopment of


the human fetus prior to the 20th week of
gestation.Am
J
Obset
Gvnecol.103:784-800,1969

14.HL
Age Table

JEAN84

12w4d
40w0d

to

Jeanty,et.al. : Obstetrical Ultrasound New


York,
McGraw-Hill,1983

15.BD
Growth Table

MAY82

12w0d
40w0d

to

Mayden,K.L.,et.al. : Orbital diameters:A new


parameter for prenatal diagnosis and dating.
Am J Obstet Gynecol.144:289-297,1982

16.FIB
Growth Table

JEAN83

14w0d
40w0d

to

Jeanty,et.al. :obstetrical Ultrasound New York,


McGraw-Hill,1983

17.HW
Growth Table

PRE86

15w0d
25wod

to

Pretorius,DH,et.al. :Fetal lateral ventricular


ratio
determined during the second trimester.
J Ultrasound Med.5:121-124,1986#

18.IOD
Growth Table

MAY82

12w0d
40w0d

to

Mayden,K.L.,et.al. : Orbital diameters:A new


parameter for prenatal diagnosis and dating.
Am J Obstet Gynecol.144:289-297,1982

19.LVW
Growth Table

PRE86

15w0d
25w0d

to

Pretorius,DH,et.al. :Fetal lateral ventricular


ratio
determined during the second trimester.
J Ultrasound Med.5:121-124,1986#

20.OD
Growth Table

MAY82

12w0d
40w0d

to

Mayden,K.L.,et.al. : Orbital diameters:A new


parameter for prenatal diagnosis and dating.
Am J Obstet Gynecol.144:289-297,1982

21.RAD
Growth Table

JEAN83

13w0d
40w0d

to

Jeanty,et.al. :obstetrical Ultrasound New York,


McGraw-Hill,1983

22.TCD
Growth Table

GOLD87

15w0d
38w0d

to

Goldstein,et.al.
Gynecol,May,
1987.

23.TIB
Growth Table

JEAN83

14w0d
40w0d

to

Jeanty,et.al. :obstetrical Ultrasound New York,


McGraw-Hill,1983

24.ULNA
Growth Table

JEAN83

13w0d
40w0d

to

Jeanty,et.al. :obstetrical Ultrasound New York,


McGraw-Hill,1983

25.CI
(BPD/OFD)
Ratio Table

HAD81

14w0d
40w0d

to

Brenner,WE,et.al. :A standard of fetal growth


for the United States of America
Am J Obstet Gynecol.126:555,1976

26.FL/AC
Ratio Table

HAD85

21w0d
42w0d

to

Hadlock,F.P.,et.al. : Use of the Femur length


/Abdominal Circumference Ratio in Detecting

:Am

of

Obset

247

Appendix

the Macrosomic Fetus. Radiology


27.FL/BPD

HOHL81

23w0d
40w0d

to

Hohler,C.W,et.al. : Comparison of Fetal Frmur


length and Biparietal Diameter in Late
Pregnancy.
Am J Obstet .Gynecol .84:165,1977

28.HC/AC

CAMP77

13w0d
42w0d

to

Campbell,S.:Ultrasound Measurement of the


Fetal
Head to Abdomen Circumference Ratio in the
Assessment of Growth Retardation .
Br.J.Obstet.Gynecol.84:165,1977

29.LVW/HW
Ratio Table

PRE86

15w0d
38w0d

to

-Pretorius,DH,et.al. :Fetal lateral ventricular


ratio determined during the second trimester.J
Ultrasound Med.5:121-124,1986
-Johnson
ML,et.al.Evaluation
of
fetal
intracranical anatomy by static and realtime
ultrasound .J Clin Ultrasound ,1980;8:311-318

30AFI table

MOORE
90

16w0d
42w0d

to

Moore : Am J obstet Gynecol.May,1990

31.BPD
Age Table

HANS85

11w2d
40w1d

to

Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound diagnosis in


Obstetrics
and
Gynecology
Springer-Verlag1985

32.OFD
Age Table

HANS85

13w4d
40w1d

to

Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound diagnosis in


Obstetrics
and
Gynecology
Springer-Verlag1985

33.CRL
Age Table

HANS85

6w0d
21w2d

to

Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound diagnosis in


Obstetrics
and
Gynecology
Springer-Verlag1985

34.FL
Age Table

HANS85

13w3d
40w6d

to

Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound diagnosis in


Obstetrics
and
Gynecology
Springer-Verlag1985

35.HC
Age Table

HANS85

14w0d
40w0d

to

Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound diagnosis in


Obstetrics
and
Gynecology
Springer-Verlag1985

36.TTD
Age Table

HANS85

14w3d
40w6d

to

Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound diagnosis in


Obstetrics
and
Gynecology
Springer-Verlag1985

37.BPD
Age Table

TODAI96

10w1d
37w4d

to

Norio Shinotsuka,et.al. :Creation of reference


data in ultrasound measurement,Jpn J Med
Ultrasonics Vol.23 No.12; 877-888,1996

38.BPD
Growth Table

TODAI96

10w0d
42w0d

to

Norio Shinotsuka,et.al. :Creation of reference


data in ultrasound measurement,Jpn J Med
Ultrasonics Vol.23 No.12; 877-888,1996

39.BPD

OSAKAU

10w0d

to

Mine Aoki,et.al. : Diagnosis of fetal growth ,

248

Appendix

Age Table

40w0d

obstetrics and Gynecology Treatment; Vol.


47 ,No.5,1983/11

40.BPD
Growth Table

OSAKAU

10w0d
40w0d

to

Mineo Aoki,et.al. : Diagnosis of fetal growth ,


obstetrics and Gynecology Treatment; Vol.
47 ,No.5,1983/11

41.BPD
Age Table

H1

11w4d
37w1d

to

Committee for ME Problems, Japan OB/GY


Society,
1989

42.AC
Growth Table

TOADI96

16w0d
42w0d

to

Norio Shinotsuka,et.al. :Creation of reference


data in ultrasound measurement,Jpn J Med
Ultrasonics Vol.23 No.12; 877-888,1996

43.AC
Age Table

TOADI96

15w3d
41w2d

to

Norio Shinotsuka,et.al. :Creation of reference


data in ultrasound measurement,Jpn J Med
Ultrasonics Vol.23 No.12; 877-888,1996

44.FL
Age Table

TOADI96

16w1d
39w3d

to

Norio Shinotsuka,et.al. :Creation of reference


data in ultrasound measurement,Jpn J Med
Ultrasonics Vol.23 No.12; 877-888,1996

45.FL
Growth Table

TOADI96

16w0d
42w0d

to

Norio Shinotsuka,et.al. :Creation of reference


data in ultrasound measurement,Jpn J Med
Ultrasonics Vol.23 No.12; 877-888,1996

46.FL
Age Table

OSAKAU

13w0d
40w0d

to

Mineo Aoki,et.al. : Diagnosis of fetal growth ,


obstetrics and Gynecology Treatment; Vol.
47 ,No.5,1983/11

47.FL
Growth Table

OSAKAU

13w0d
40w0d

to

Mineo Aoki,et.al. : Diagnosis of fetal growth ,


obstetrics and Gynecology Treatment; Vol.
47 ,No.5,1983/11

48.FL
Age Table

H1

16w6d
38w4d

to

Committee for ME Problems, Japan OB/GY


Society,
1989

49.CRL
Age Table

TODAI

8w0d

to

14w0d

Takashi Okai,et.al. : Approach to new


perinatal control by comprehensive analysis
of fetal data;Journal of Japan OB/GY
Society,Vol38,No.8,
1209-1217,1986

50.CRL
Age Table

OSAKAU

7w0d

to

12w6d

Mineo Aoki,et.al. : Diagnosis of fetal growth ,


obstetrics and Gynecology Treatment; Vol.
47 ,No.5,1983/11

51.CRL
Growth Table

OSAKAU

7w0d

to

12w6d

Mineo Aoki,et.al. : Diagnosis of fetal growth ,


obstetrics and Gynecology Treatment; Vol.
47 ,No.5,1983/11

52.GS
Age Table

TODAI

4w0d

to

11w0d

Takashi Okai,et.al. : Approach to new


perinatal control by comprehensive analysis
of fetal data;Journal of Japan OB/GY

249

Appendix

Society,Vol38,No.8,
1209-1217,1986
53.LV
Age Table

TODAI

21W0d

to 40w0d

Takashi Okai,et.al. : Approach to new


perinatal control by comprehensive analysis
of fetal data;Journal of Japan OB/GY
Society,Vol38,No.8,
1209-1217,1986

54.FTA
Age Table

OSAKAU

14w0d
40w0d

to

Mineo Aoki,et.al. : Diagnosis of fetal growth ,


obstetrics and Gynecology Treatment; Vol.
47 ,No.5,1983/11

55.FTA
Growth Table

OSAKAU

14w0d
40w0d

to

Mineo Aoki,et.al. : Diagnosis of fetal growth ,


obstetrics and Gynecology Treatment; Vol.
47 ,No.5,1983/11

56.HL
Age Table

OSAKAU

13w0d
40w0d

to

Mineo Aoki,et.al. : Diagnosis of fetal growth ,


obstetrics and Gynecology Treatment; Vol.
47 ,No.5,1983/11

57.HL
Growth Table

OSAKAU

13w0d
40w0d

to

Mineo Aoki,et.al. : Diagnosis of fetal growth ,


obstetrics and Gynecology Treatment; Vol.
47 ,No.5,1983/11

58.APTD
Age Table

None

Reserve

Takashi Okai,et.al. : Approach to new


perinatal control by comprehensive analysis
of fetal data;Journal of Japan OB/GY
Society,Vol38,No.8,
1209-1217,1986

59.TTD
Age Table

None

Reserve

Takashi Okai,et.al. : Approach to new


perinatal control by comprehensive analysis
of fetal data;Journal of Japan OB/GY
Society,Vol38,No.8,
1209-1217,1986

60.APTD*TTD
Age Table

TOADI96

16w1d
39w2d

to

Norio Shinotsuka,et.al. :Creation of reference


data in ultrasound measurement,Jpn J Med
Ultrasonics Vol.23 No.12; 877-888,1996

61.APTD*TTD
Growth
Table

TOADI96

16w3d
42w3d

to

Norio Shinotsuka,et.al. :Creation of reference


data in ultrasound measurement,Jpn J Med
Ultrasonics Vol.23 No.12; 877-888,1996

250

Appendix

Appendix B

Fetal Weight Measurement Formula

Name

Calculation Formula

Shepard

FW=3 - 1.7492 + 0.166*BPD + 0.046* AC -0.002646* AC * BPD

Hadlock_1

FW=1.304 + 0.05281* AC + 0.1938*FL-0.004* AC * FL

Hadlock_2

FW=1.335 - 0.0034* AC *FL + 0.0316* BPD + 0.0457* AC + 0.1623*FL

Hadlock_3

FW=1.326 - 0.00326* AC * FL + 0.0107*HC + 0.0438* AC + 0.158* FL

Hadlock_4

FW=1.3596 - 0.00386*AC * FL + 0.0064* HC + 0.00061* BPD*AC + 0.0424*AC +


0.174* FL

Hadlock_5

FW=1.11 + 0.05845* AC - 0.000604* AC * AC - 0.007365* BPD *BPD +


0.000595*BPD* AC + 0.1694*BPD

Mertz

FW=157.07* AC - 3200.4 + 15.9* BPD*BPD

Osaka U.

FW=1.256*BPD * BPD *BPD + 3.5065*FTA*FL + 6.3

Tokyo U.1

FW=1.73 * BPD * BPD * BPD + 28*APTD* TTD - 217

Tokyo U.2

FW=1.07* BPD *BPD * BPD + 3.42* APTD *TTD *FL

Hansmann

FW=1000*(0.515263 - 1.05775* BPD - 0.020562*TTD* TTD + 0.649154*TTD +


0.0930707* BPD *BPD)

Campbell

FW= 1000* EXP(0.282*AC-0.00331*AC* AC -4.564)

251

Appendix

Appendix C

Acoustic Output Reporting Table for Probe of TH-100

1. C361 Electronic Convex Probe R50frequency_3.5MHz


Operating Condition: B Mode
Tranducer Model: C361 Electronic Convex Probe R50, 3.5MHz

No.

Test item name

Maximum output power


mW

P_MPa

IobmW/ cm2

IsptamW/ cm2

System setup

Lpmm

WPb6mm

prrkHz

srrHz

10

Output beam
dimensionscm2

11

fawfMHz

252

Standards and StandardNo.

metrical results

Maximum Spatial-average output


power
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2a

32.4

Peak rarefaction pressure


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2b
Output beam intensity
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2c

Spatial- peak temporal-average


intensity
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2d
Mainframe setup of the Ultrasound
equipment
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2e
The distance between tranducer output
surface and the maximum pulse aquare
integral
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2f
-6dB pulse beam width
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2g

Pulse repetition frequency


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2h

Scan repetition frequency


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2h
The dimensions which parallel and
plumbreference direction. In scan
modingthey only involve the middle
scanning beam. In many conditions,
especially in contacting system, they
equal to the geometry dimensions of the
tranducer assemblies.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2i
arithmetic average ultrasound work
frequency
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2j

1.80
4.80
57.02
Output power
100
angle2
41

12.45
1.25
inapplicability
23.81

6.74

2.79

Appendix

12

APF

13

Power-up mode

14

AIF

15

Initialization mode

16

Acooustic output freeze

Acoustic power-up fraction


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2k
Prescriptive state for auto-confirming
operating mode and system setup. If the
state is defined by operater, the item is
inapplicability and n/a for short.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2l
Acoustic initialization fraction
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2m
If applicablefor the system which is
defined by operaters, defined by
operaters or inapplicabilityn/ashould
be declared.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2n
If the system has this function, it should
declare yes. Otherwise, it should
declare no.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2o

100%

B mode

100%

B mode

yes

2. C361 Electronic Convex Probe R50, frequency 3.5MHz


Operating Condition: M Mode
Tranducer Model: C361 Electronic Convex probe R50, 3.5MHz

No.

Test item name

Maximum output power


mW

P_MPa

IobmW/ cm2

IsptamW/ cm

System setup

Lpmm

Standards and StandardNo.

metrical results

Maximum Spatial-average output


power
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2a

1.6

Peak rarefaction pressure


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2b
Output beam intensity
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2c

Spatial- peak temporal-average


intensity
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2d
Mainframe setup of the Ultrasound
equipment
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2e
The distance between tranducer output
surface and the maximum pulse aquare
integral
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2f

1.41
0.23
6.68
Output power
100
M ratehigh
58

253

Appendix

WPb6mm

prrkHz

srrHz

10

Output beam
dimensionscm2

11

fawfMHz

12

APF

13

Power-up mode

14

AIF

15

Initialization mode

16

Acooustic output freeze

254

-6dB pulse beam width


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2g

Pulse repetition frequency


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2h

Scan repetition frequency


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2h
The dimensions which parallel and
plumbreference direction. In scan
modingthey only involve the middle
scanning beam. In many conditions,
especially in contacting system, they
equal to the geometry dimensions of the
tranducer assemblies.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2i
arithmetic average ultrasound work
frequency
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2j
Acoustic power-up fraction
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2k
Prescriptive state for auto-confirming
operating mode and system setup. If the
state is defined by operater, the item is
inapplicability and n/a for short.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2l
Acoustic initialization fraction
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2m
If applicablefor the system which is
defined by operaters, defined by
operaters or inapplicabilityn/ashould
be declared.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2n
If the system has this function, it should
declare yes. Otherwise, it should
declare no.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2o

12.26
4.22
0.051
inapplicability

6.74

2.81
127.65%

B mode

127.65%

B mode

yes

Appendix

3. L553 Electronic Linear probe, 7.5MHz


Operating Condition: B mode
Tranducer Model: L553 Electronic Linear probe, 7.5MHz

No.

Test item name

Maximum output power


mW

P_MPa

IobmW/ cm2

IsptamW/ cm2

System setup

Lpmm

WPb6mm

prrkHz

srrHz

10

Output beam
dimensionscm2

11

fawfMHz

12

APF

Standards and StandardNo.

metrical results

Maximum Spatial-average output


power
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2a

28.8

Peak rarefaction pressure


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2b
Output beam intensity
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2c

Spatial- peak temporal-average


intensity
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2d
Mainframe setup of the Ultrasound
equipment
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2e
The distance between tranducer output
surface and the maximum pulse aquare
integral
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2f
-6dB pulse beam width
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2g

Pulse repetition frequency


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2h

Scan repetition frequency


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2h
The dimensions which parallel and
plumbreference direction. In scan
modingthey only involve the middle
scanning beam. In many conditions,
especially in contacting system, they
equal to the geometry dimensions of the
tranducer assemblies.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2i
arithmetic average ultrasound work
frequency
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2j
Acoustic power-up fraction
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2k

4.86
12.30
396.45
Output power
100
angle2
22

11.06
1.03
inapplicability
47.39

2.34

5.00
100%

255

Appendix

13

Power-up mode

14

AIF

15

Initialization mode

16

Acooustic output freeze

Prescriptive state for auto-confirming


operating mode and system setup. If the
state is defined by operater, the item is
inapplicability and n/a for short.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2l
Acoustic initialization fraction
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2m
If applicablefor the system which is
defined by operaters, defined by
operaters or inapplicabilityn/ashould
be declared.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2n
If the system has this function, it should
declare yes. Otherwise, it should
declare no.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2o

B mode

100%

B mode

yes

4. L553 Electronic Linear probe7.5MHz


Operating condition: M mode
Tranducer Model: L553 Electronic Linear Probe, 7.5MHz

No.

Test item name

Maximum output power


mW

P_MPa

IobmW/ cm2

IsptamW/ cm

System setup

Lpmm

WPb6mm

256

Standards and StandardNo.

metrical results

Maximum Spatial-average output


power
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2a

0.7

Peak rarefaction pressure


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2b
Output beam intensity
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2c

Spatial- peak temporal-average


intensity
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2d
Mainframe setup of the Ultrasound
equipment
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2e
The distance between tranducer output
surface and the maximum pulse aquare
integral
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2f
-6dB pulse beam width
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2g

4.80
0.29
32.81
Output power
100
M ratehigh
22

1.92
2.34

Appendix

prrkHz

srrHz

10

Output beam
dimensionscm2

11

fawfMHz

12

APF

13

Power-up mode

14

AIF

15

Initialization mode

16

Acooustic output freeze

Pulse repetition frequency


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2h

Scan repetition frequency


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2h
The dimensions which parallel and
plumbreference direction. In scan
modingthey only involve the middle
scanning beam. In many conditions,
especially in contacting system, they
equal to the geometry dimensions of the
tranducer assemblies.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2i
arithmetic average ultrasound work
frequency
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2j
Acoustic power-up fraction
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2k
Prescriptive state for auto-confirming
operating mode and system setup. If the
state is defined by operater, the item is
inapplicability and n/a for short.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2l
Acoustic initialization fraction
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2m
If applicablefor the system which is
defined by operaters, defined by
operaters or inapplicabilityn/ashould
be declared.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2n
If the system has this function, it should
declare yes. Otherwise, it should
declare no.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2o

0.051
inapplicability

2.34

5.01
101.25%

B mode

101.25%

B mode

yes

257

Appendix

5. E663 Electronic Endocavity probe R=10, 6.5MHz


Operating Condition: B mode
Tranducer Model: E663 Electronic Endocavity probe R=10, 6.5MHz

No.

Test item name

Maximum output power


mW

P_MPa

IobmW/ cm2

IsptamW/ cm2

System setup

Lpmm

WPb6mm

prrkHz

srrHz

10

Output beam
dimensionscm2

11

fawfMHz

12

APF

258

Standards and StandardNo.

metrical results

Maximum Spatial-average output


power
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2a

12.6

Peak rarefaction pressure


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2b
Output beam intensity
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2c

Spatial- peak temporal-average


intensity
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2d
Mainframe setup of the Ultrasound
equipment
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2e
The distance between tranducer output
surface and the maximum pulse aquare
integral
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2f
-6dB pulse beam width
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2g

Pulse repetition frequency


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2h

Scan repetition frequency


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2h
The dimensions which parallel and
plumbreference direction. In scan
modingthey only involve the middle
scanning beam. In many conditions,
especially in contacting system, they
equal to the geometry dimensions of the
tranducer assemblies.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2i
arithmetic average ultrasound work
frequency
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2j
Acoustic power-up fraction
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2k

2.44
7.92
6.53
Output power
100
angle2
37

26.34
2.20
inapplicability
36.49

1.59

5.12
100%

Appendix

13

Power-up mode

14

AIF

15

Initialization mode

16

Acooustic output freeze

Prescriptive state for auto-confirming


operating mode and system setup. If the
state is defined by operater, the item is
inapplicability and n/a for short.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2l
Acoustic initialization fraction
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2m
If applicablefor the system which is
defined by operaters, defined by
operaters or inapplicabilityn/ashould
be declared.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2n
If the system has this function, it should
declare yes. Otherwise, it should
declare no.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2o

B mode

100%

B mode

yes

6. E663 Electronic Endocavity probe R=10, 6.5MHz


Operating Condition: M mode
Tranducer Model: E663Electronic Endocavity probe R=10, 6.5MHz

No.

Test item name

Maximum output power


mW

P_MPa

IobmW/ cm2

IsptamW/ cm

System setup

Lpmm

WPb6mm

Standards and StandardNo.

metrical results

Maximum Spatial-average output


power
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2a

0.4

Peak rarefaction pressure


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2b
Output beam intensity
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2c

Spatial- peak temporal-average


intensity
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2d
Mainframe setup of the Ultrasound
equipment
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2e
The distance between tranducer output
surface and the maximum pulse aquare
integral
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2f
-6dB pulse beam width
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2g

2.25
0.25
6.20
Output power
100
M ratehigh
37

2.09
3.91

259

Appendix

prrkHz

srrHz

10

Output beam
dimensionscm2

11

fawfMHz

12

APF

13

Power-up mode

14

AIF

15

Initialization mode

16

Acooustic output freeze

260

Pulse repetition frequency


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2h

Scan repetition frequency


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2h
The dimensions which parallel and
plumbreference direction. In scan
modingthey only involve the middle
scanning beam. In many conditions,
especially in contacting system, they
equal to the geometry dimensions of the
tranducer assemblies.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2i
arithmetic average ultrasound work
frequency
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2j
Acoustic power-up fraction
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2k
Prescriptive state for auto-confirming
operating mode and system setup. If the
state is defined by operater, the item is
inapplicability and n/a for short.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2l
Acoustic initialization fraction
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2m
If applicablefor the system which is
defined by operaters, defined by
operaters or inapplicabilityn/ashould
be declared.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2n
If the system has this function, it should
declare yes. Otherwise, it should
declare no.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2o

0.051
inapplicability

1.59

5.17
108.44%

B mode

108.44%

B mode

yes

Appendix

7. M201 Electronic Micro Convex R=20, 3.5MHZ


Operating Condition: B mode
Tranducer Model: M201 Electronic Micro Convex R20, 3.5MHz

No.

Test item name

Standards and Standard No.

Maximum output power


mW

Maximum
power

Spatial-average

Metrical results

output
54.4

GB 16846-1997 4.2.2a

Peak rarefaction pressure


2

P_MPa

IobmW/ cm2

IsptamW/ cm

System setup

Lpmm

WPb6mm

prrkHz

GB
4.2.2b
Output beam intensity
GB
4.2.2c

Spatialintensity

peak

16846-1997

2.9

16846-1997

42.8

temporal-average
108.8

GB 16846-1997 4.2.2d
Mainframe setup of the Ultrasound
equipment
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2e
The distance between tranducer output
surface and the maximum pulse aquare
integral
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2f
-6dB pulse beam width
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2g

Max. Gain

56

4.4

3.7

Pulse repetition frequency


GB

16846-1997

4.5

16846-1997

21.2

4.2.2h

Scan repetition frequency


9

10

srrHz

Output beam
dimensionscm2

GB

4.2.2h
The dimensions which parallel and
plumbreference direction. In scan
moding they only involve the middle
scanning beam. In many conditions,
especially in contacting system, they
equal to the geometry dimensions of the
tranducer assemblies.
GB
16846-1997
4.2.2i

12.7
9.2

261

Appendix

11

fawfMHz

12

APF

13

Power-up mode

14

AIF

15

Initialization mode

16

Acooustic output freeze

17
18
19

Lttmm
Ltsmm
Mode

262

Arithmetic average ultrasound work


frequency
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2j
Acoustic power-up fraction
GB
16846-1997
4.2.2k
Prescriptive state for auto-confirming
operating mode and system setup. If the
state is defined by operater, the item is
inapplicability and n/a for short.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2l
Acoustic initialization fraction
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2m
If applicablefor the system which is
defined by operaters, defined by
operaters or inapplicabilityn/ashould
be declared.n/a
GB
16846-1997
4.2.2n
If the system has this function, it should
declare yes. Otherwise, it should
declare no.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2o

2.0

100%

B mode

100%

B mode

Yes

Contact Mode
B+B

Appendix

8. M201 Electronic Micro Convex R=20, 3.5MHZ


Operating Condition: M mode
Tranducer Model: M201 Electronic Micro Convex R20, 3.5MHz

No.

Test item name


Maximum output power
mW

P_MPa

IobmW/ cm2

IsptamW/ cm2

System setup

Lpmm

WPb6mm

prrkHz

srrHz

10

Output beam
dimensionscm2

11

fawfMHz

12

APF

Standards and Standard No.


Maximum
power

Spatial-average

Metrical results

output
6.8

GB 16846-1997 4.2.2a

Peak rarefaction pressure


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2b
Output beam intensity
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2c

Spatialintensity

peak

2.3
8.5

temporal-average
77.15

GB 16846-1997 4.2.2d
Mainframe setup of the Ultrasound
equipment
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2e
The distance between tranducer output
surface and the maximum pulse aquare
integral
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2f
-6dB pulse beam width
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2g

Pulse repetition frequency


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2h

Scan repetition frequency


GB 16846-1997 4.2.2h
The dimensions which parallel and
plumbreference direction. In scan
modingthey only involve the middle
scanning beam. In many conditions,
especially in contacting system, they
equal to the geometry dimensions of the
tranducer assemblies.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2i
Arithmetic average ultrasound work
frequency
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2j
Acoustic power-up fraction
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2k

Max. Gain

58

4.9
5.5

11.4

10.5
8.1

2.1
79%

263

Appendix

13

Power-up mode

14

AIF

15

Initialization mode

16

Acooustic output freeze

17
18
19

Lttmm
Ltsmm
Mode

264

Prescriptive state for auto-confirming


operating mode and system setup. If the
state is defined by operater, the item is
inapplicability and n/a for short.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2l
Acoustic initialization fraction
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2m
If applicablefor the system which is
defined by operaters, defined by
operaters or inapplicabilityn/ashould
be declared.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2n
If the system has this function, it should
declare yes. Otherwise, it should
declare no.
GB 16846-1997 4.2.2o

B mode

79%

B mode

Yes

Contact Mode
B+M

Appendix

Appendix D

Guidance and Teknovas declaration ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS


Guidance and Teknovas declaration electromagnetic emissions

TH-100 is intended for use in the electronmagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the
user of TH-100 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test
RF emissions
CISPR 11
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Harmonic emissions
IEC 61000-3-2

Compliance

Electromagnetic environment guidance

Group 1

TH-100 uses RF energy only for its internal


function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low
and are not likely to cause any interference in
nearby electronic equipment.

Class A

Class A

Voltage fluctuations/
flicker emissions

Complies

IEC 61000-3-3
TH-100 is suitable for use in all establishments
other than domestic, and may be used in domestic
establishments and those directly connected to
the public low-volate power supply network that
supplies buildings used for domestic purposes,
provided the following warning is needed:
Warning: This equipment is intended for use by
healthcare professionals only. This equipment
may cause radio interference or may disrupt the
operation of nearby equipment. It may be
necessary to take mitigation measures, such as
re-orienting or relocating TH-100 or shielding the
location.

265

Appendix

Appendix E

Guidance and Teknovas declaration ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY

Guidance and Teknovas declaration electromagnetic immunity


TH-100 is intended for use in the electronmagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of TH-100
should assure that it is used in such an environment.
IEC 60601
Immunity test

Compliance level
test level

Electrostatic
discharge (ESD)

6kV contact

6kV contact

8kV air

8kV air

Electrical fast
transient/burst

2kV for power supply


lines

2kV for power supply


lines

IEC 61000-4-4

1kV for input/output lines

1kV for input/output lines

Surge

1kV line(s) to line(s)

1kV line(s) to line(s)

IEC 61000-4-5

2kV line(s) to earth

2kV line(s) to earth

Voltage dips, short


interruptions and
voltage variations
on power supply
input lines

<5% UT

<5% UT

(>95% dip in UT) for 0.5


cycle

(>95% dip in UT) for 0.5


cycle

40% UT

40% UT

(60% dip in UT) for 5


cycles

(60% dip in UT) for 5


cycles

70% UT

70% UT

(30% dip in UT) for 25


cycles

(30% dip in UT) for 25


cycles

<5% UT

<5% UT

(>95% dip in UT) for 5 s

(>95% dip in UT) for 5 s

3 A/m

3 A/m

IEC 61000-4-2

IEC 61000-4-11

Power frequency
(50/60 Hz)
magnetic field
IEC 61000-4-8
NOTE

266

UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

Electromagnetic environment
guidance
Floors should be wood, concrete or
ceramic tile. If floors are covered with
synthetic material, the relative
humidity should be at least 30%.
Mains power quality should be that of
a typical commercial or hospital
environment.

Mains power quality should be that of


a typical commercial or hospital
environment.
Mains power quality should be that of
a typical commercial or hospital
environment. If the user of TH-100
requires continued operation during
power mains interruptions, it is
recommended that TH-100 be
powered from an uninterruptible
power supply or a battery.

Power frequency magnetic fields


should be at levels characteristic of a
typical location in a typical commercial
or hospital environment.

Appendix

Appendix F

Guidance and Teknovas declaration ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY

Guidance and Teknovas declaration electromagnetic immunity


TH-100 is intended for use in the electronmagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of TH-100
should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test

IEC 60601

Compliance

test level

level

Electromagnetic environment guidance


Portable and mobile RF communications equipment
should be used no closer to any part of TH-100, including
cables, than the recommended separation distance
calculated from the equation applicable to the frequency of
the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance

Conducted RF

3 Vrms

IEC 61000-4-6

150 kHz to 80 MHz

Radiated RF

3 V/m

IEC 61000-4-3

80 MHz to 2.5 GHz

3V

3 V/m

d=

3.5
3 P

d=

3.5
3 P

80 MHz to 800 MHz

d=

3.5
3 P

800 MHz to 2.5 GHz

where P is the maximum output power rating of the


transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer and d is the recommended separation
distance in metres (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined
a
by an electromagnetic site survey, should be less than
b
the compliance level in each frequency range.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked
with the following symbol:

NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
a

Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile
radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy.
To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be
considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which TH-100 is used exceeds the applicable RF
compliance level above, TH-100 should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed,
additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating TH-100.
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.

267

Appendix

Appendix G

Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF


communications equipment and TH-100

Recommended separation distances between


portable and mobile RF communications equipment and TH-100
TH-100 is intended for use in an electronmagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The
customer or the user of TH-100 can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance
between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and TH-100 as recommended below,
according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
m

Rated maximum
output power of

150 kHz to 80 MHz

80 MHz to 800 MHz

800 MHz tp 2.5 GHz

transmitter
W

d=

3.5
3 P

d=

3.5
3 P

d=

7
3 P

0.01

0.12

0.12

0.23

0.1

0.37

0.37

0.74

1.17

1.17

2.33

10

3.69

3.69

7.38

100

11.67

11.67

23.33

For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in metres
(m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output
power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.

268

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen